Programme Code: 84054

105
Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies 中英雙語學(榮譽)文學士 Programme Code: 84054 Definitive Programme Document for 2017/18 Cohort

Transcript of Programme Code: 84054

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

中英雙語學(榮譽)文學士

Programme Code 84054

Definitive Programme Document

for 201718 Cohort

This Definitive Scheme Document is issued in August 2017 It is subject to review and

changes which the School can decide to make from time to time Students will be informed

of the changes as and when appropriate

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION ONE GENERAL INFORMATION Page

1 PROGRAMME HOST 1

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 1

3 CONTACT INFORMATION 1

4 AWARD TITLE 2

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY 2

6 ATTENDANCE 2

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES 2

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS 3

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer 4 92 Exemption 5 10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum 5

102 Programme Structure 6

103 Recommended Progression Pattern 9

104 Curriculum Mapping 10

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION 11

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 11

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment 11

132 Assessment Methods 12

133 Grading 13

134 Grade Point Average 14

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel 15

136 Role of Board of Examiners 16

137 Academic Probation 16

138 Progression and De-registration 16

139 Late Assessment 17

1310 Retaking of Subjects 17

1311 Eligibility for Award 18

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification 18

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results 20

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions 20

1315 Exceptional Circumstances 20 1316 Other Regulations 21

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION 21

SECTION TWO SUBJECT DESCRIPTION FORMS OF

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS SUBJECTS

Page

Compulsory Subjects

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 22

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 25

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 28

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 31

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 34

SPD3270 Analysis of English 38

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes

41

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 44

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 48

Elective Subjects

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 52

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 56

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 60

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 63

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English 66

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 72

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 75

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 79

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 82

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 85

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 88

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 92

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 94

Section One

General Information

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

This Definitive Scheme Document is issued in August 2017 It is subject to review and

changes which the School can decide to make from time to time Students will be informed

of the changes as and when appropriate

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION ONE GENERAL INFORMATION Page

1 PROGRAMME HOST 1

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 1

3 CONTACT INFORMATION 1

4 AWARD TITLE 2

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY 2

6 ATTENDANCE 2

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES 2

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS 3

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer 4 92 Exemption 5 10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum 5

102 Programme Structure 6

103 Recommended Progression Pattern 9

104 Curriculum Mapping 10

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION 11

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 11

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment 11

132 Assessment Methods 12

133 Grading 13

134 Grade Point Average 14

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel 15

136 Role of Board of Examiners 16

137 Academic Probation 16

138 Progression and De-registration 16

139 Late Assessment 17

1310 Retaking of Subjects 17

1311 Eligibility for Award 18

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification 18

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results 20

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions 20

1315 Exceptional Circumstances 20 1316 Other Regulations 21

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION 21

SECTION TWO SUBJECT DESCRIPTION FORMS OF

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS SUBJECTS

Page

Compulsory Subjects

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 22

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 25

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 28

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 31

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 34

SPD3270 Analysis of English 38

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes

41

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 44

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 48

Elective Subjects

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 52

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 56

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 60

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 63

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English 66

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 72

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 75

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 79

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 82

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 85

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 88

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 92

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 94

Section One

General Information

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION ONE GENERAL INFORMATION Page

1 PROGRAMME HOST 1

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 1

3 CONTACT INFORMATION 1

4 AWARD TITLE 2

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY 2

6 ATTENDANCE 2

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES 2

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS 3

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer 4 92 Exemption 5 10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum 5

102 Programme Structure 6

103 Recommended Progression Pattern 9

104 Curriculum Mapping 10

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION 11

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 11

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment 11

132 Assessment Methods 12

133 Grading 13

134 Grade Point Average 14

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel 15

136 Role of Board of Examiners 16

137 Academic Probation 16

138 Progression and De-registration 16

139 Late Assessment 17

1310 Retaking of Subjects 17

1311 Eligibility for Award 18

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification 18

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results 20

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions 20

1315 Exceptional Circumstances 20 1316 Other Regulations 21

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION 21

SECTION TWO SUBJECT DESCRIPTION FORMS OF

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS SUBJECTS

Page

Compulsory Subjects

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 22

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 25

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 28

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 31

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 34

SPD3270 Analysis of English 38

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes

41

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 44

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 48

Elective Subjects

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 52

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 56

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 60

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 63

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English 66

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 72

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 75

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 79

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 82

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 85

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 88

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 92

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 94

Section One

General Information

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

SECTION TWO SUBJECT DESCRIPTION FORMS OF

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS SUBJECTS

Page

Compulsory Subjects

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 22

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 25

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 28

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 31

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 34

SPD3270 Analysis of English 38

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes

41

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 44

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 48

Elective Subjects

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 52

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 56

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 60

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 63

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English 66

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 72

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 75

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 79

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 82

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 85

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 88

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 92

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 94

Section One

General Information

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

Section One

General Information

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

1

1 PROGRAMME HOST

The Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies is hosted by the School of

Professional Education and Executive Development (SPEED) which assumes the

overall academic responsibility in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and

learning

2 PROGRAMME OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

21 The School Programme Committee (SPC) oversees the operation of all PolyU-SPEED

award programmes The SPC meets at least twice a year

22 A Programme Executive Group (PEG) will be formed to manage the day-to-day

operation of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies The PEG which

operates informally is chaired by the Programme Leader and includes staff with key

responsibilities for the programme Student representatives will be invited to meet

with the PEG in each semester to provide feedback

23 Students will also be invited to nominate their representatives to join the StudentStaff

Consultative Group (SSCG) in SPEED SSCG is a formal channel through which

student views are obtained It meets at least once per semester and reports or makes

recommendations as appropriate to the SPC

24 Students are encouraged to provide feedback on subject level via the Student

Feedback Questionnaire (SFQ) exercise which will be considered by the related

parties for continuous improvement of teaching and learning

3 CONTACT INFORMATION

Programme Leader

Dr K H Cheung

(Tel 3746-00774 Email khcheunspeed-polyueduhk)

Deputy Programme Leader

Dr Val Chen

(Tel 3746 0084 Email spczilispeed-polyueduhk)

Administrative Staff

Ms Elsa Ho Programme Officer

(Tel 3746 0070 Email ooelsahospeed-polyueduhk)

Ms Cecilia Lai Administrative Assistant

(Tel 3746 0069)

General Enquiry Line 3400 2828

Fax Number 2363 0540

Website httpwwwspeed-polyueduhk

Email Address spawardspeed-polyueduhk

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

2

4 AWARD TITLE

Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

Students may apply to exit the programme for the ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo upon fulfilling the requirements as specified in Section 13112

of this document

5 MODE STUDY LOAD AND DURATION OF STUDY

51 The programme is offered in full-time mode of study

52 The normal study load is 15 credits in each semester

53 Prior approval from the School is required if students wish to deviate from the

recommended study load The maximum study load to be taken by a student in a

semester is 21 credits1 unless exceptional approval is given by the Director of SPEED

For such cases students will be reminded that the study load approved should not be

taken as grounds for academic appeal

54 Students on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To help

improve the academic performance of the students on academic probation the School

will decide the maximum number of credits to be taken by these students on an

individual basis

55 The normal duration of the programme is 2 years The maximum period of

registration is twice the normal duration ie 4 years

6 ATTENDANCE

It is important that students attend classes and study related activities regularly and

punctually Participation forms a critical part in the learning process contributing to

the desired learning outcomes Absence will affect study progress and students should

not be absent without good reason

Some subjects under this programme are Continuing Education Fund (CEF)

reimbursable subjects For CEF reimbursement claims students are required to fulfil

the attendance requirement as stipulated by the Office of CEF

1 Not applicable to students on academic probation

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

3

7 PROGRAMME AIMS AND OUTCOMES

71 Aims of the Programme

The overarching aim of the programme is to build on the linguistic knowledge and skills

of graduates from relevant Associate Degree Higher Diploma programmes producing

knowledgeable Chinese-English bilinguals with a broad linguistic base who can

approach language and related cultural issues intellectually contribute to the

development of bilingual studies and apply their expertise to related professions in Hong

Kong and other cosmopolitan Chinese communities

72 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

Graduates of the programme are expected to

(a) have a cultivated understanding of the academic disciplines that form the knowledge

foundation for a career closely related to bilingual studies

(b) have a broad linguistic base that forms the skills foundation for a career where

bilingual studies are applicable

(c) be equipped with sound knowledge of Chinese and English

(d) be equipped with good command of Chinese and English

(e) be able to analyse and solve problems relating to bilingual studies

(f) be able to develop critical thinking

(g) be able to cope with stringent demands in terms of ethics leadership etc made by

society and the professional world

73 Correlation between Programme Intended Learning Outcomes and Institutional Learning

Outcomes

The following table shows the correlation of the programme intended learning

outcomes and PolyUrsquos institutional learning outcomes at undergraduate degree level

Programme

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Institutional Learning Outcomes for Undergraduate Degree

Competent

professional

Critical

thinker

Effective

communicator

Innovative

problem

solver

Lifelong

learner

Ethical

leader

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

4

8 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS

81 The minimum requirements for admission to the programme are

(a) Holders of an Associate Degree a Higher Diploma or equivalent qualification in

relevant disciplines awarded by recognised universities institutions

(b) Those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached

the age of 25 before 1 September in the year in which they seek admission may

apply as mature applicants Mature applicants should possess relevant working

experience in senior positions and have completed post-secondary studies in

related fields They will also be required to pass an admission test and

demonstrate to an Admission Interview Panel their ability to complete the

programme

82 Applicants who apply for admission with non-local qualifications are also required to

attain the following English language requirement

IELTS 60 or TOEFL 550 (paper based) 213 (computer based) 80 (Internet

based)

The above requirement may be exempted for applicants who have completed sub-

degree programmes or equivalent with English as the medium of instruction

9 CREDIT TRANSFER AND EXEMPTION

91 Credit Transfer

Students will be given credits for recognised previous study and the credits will be

counted towards meeting the requirements of the award Normally not more than

50 of the required number of credits for the academic award may be transferable

from approved institutions outside The Hong Kong Polytechnic University (PolyU)

For transfer of credits from programmes within the PolyU normally not more than

67 of the required credits for the award can be transferred In cases where both

types of credits are transferred not more than 50 of the required number of credits

for the award may be transferred Grades may or may not be given for the transferred

credits

The programme is an articulation degree programme Students normally will not be

given credit transfer for any required Cluster-Area Requirements (CAR) and Service-

Learning subjects under General University Requirements (GUR) and they must

complete at least 60 credits2 to be eligible for the award Students who have

completed comparable subjects at sub-degree studies may apply for exemption

Should exemption be granted students will be required to take other electives

(including free electives) to make up the total of 60 credits2 required

2 The minimum requirement of 60 credits does not include the Language and Communication

Requirements (LCR) subjects under GUR which are applicable to individual students

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

5

The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgement In assessing the

transferability of subjects previously taken the syllabus of that subject should be

carefully scrutinised to ascertain that it is comparable to the curriculum of the

programme Other relevant information may also be required to ascertain the

academic standing of the institution offering the previous study Decision on granting

credit transfer lies with the School

For credit transfer of retaken subjects the grade attained in the last attempt should be

taken in the case of credit transfer with grade being carried over Students applying

for credit transfer for a subject taken in other institutions are required to declare that

the subject grade used for claiming credit transfer was attained in the last attempt of

the subject in their previous studies If a student fails in the last attempt of a retaken

subject no credit transfer should be granted despite the fact that the student may have

attained a pass grade for the subject in the earlier attempts

Students should not be granted credit transfer for a subject which they have attempted

and failed in their current study

The validity period of subject credits earned is 8 years starting from the year in which

the subject is completed (eg if the qualification credit was earned in 201617 the

validity period should count from 2017 for 8 years) Credits earned from previous

study should remain valid at the time when the student applies for transfer of credits

92 Exemption

Students may be granted exemption from taking certain subjects if they have

successfully completed similar subjects at a comparable level in other programmes

The credits associated with the exempted subjects will not be counted for satisfying

the credit requirements of the programme In such case students will be advised to

take other subjects to satisfy the credit requirements

10 CURRICULUM DESIGN

101 Outcome-based Curriculum

University education goes beyond merely mastering accumulation of factual

knowledge It is vital to develop studentsrsquo ability to solve problems and think

critically These focuses are translated from the initial programme objectives to the

teaching approaches and evaluation of student performance

The underpinning curriculum design principle for this programme is outcome-based

learning An outcome-based curriculum provides a rigorous and robust delineation of

the professional competence It also highlights the generic abilities that are

considered important for the graduates of this programme

Explicitly specified outcomes give a clear direction as to how teaching and assessment

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

6

should be planned aligned and carried out Ultimately this enhances coherence and

integration among subjects within the programme

In addition students are encouraged to take more responsibility for their own learning

in an outcome-based curriculum When learning outcomes are stated clearly students

are able to plan their own learning more effectively

102 Programme Structure

1021 The programme of study consists of at least 60 credits All students are also required to

complete a non-credit-bearing Work-Integrated Education component

(a) General University Requirements (GUR) (Minimum 9 credits)

Nature Details Credits

Language and

Communication

Requirements (LCR)

6 credits in English amp

3 credits in Chinese

(Students who have met the equivalent standard

of the undergraduate degree LCR will not be

required to take these credits Individual

students who are required to take LCR subjects

will be advised of the details before programme

commencement)

9

Cluster-Area

Requirements (CAR) One subject

with Chinese Reading amp

Writing Requirements and China Studies

Requirement embedded

One subject with English Reading amp

Writing Requirements embedded

3

3

Service-Learning (SL)

Free elective

Prior to the full implementation of SL

students may take a 3-credit free elective in

lieu of SL

3

The latest information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-polyueduhkmySPEED)

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

7

(b) Discipline Specific Requirements (DSR) (51 credits)

Indicative Area Subject Title Level

Compulsory Subjects (9 subjects 3 credits each)

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies 3

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace 3

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions 3

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese 3

SPD3270 Analysis of English 3

Bilingual Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication 3

DSLR English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes 4

DSLR Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry 4

Capstone SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) 4

Elective Subjects^ (any 8 subjects 3 credits each at most 1 subject at Level 3)

English Language

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals 3

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals 3

SPD4468 Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

4

Linguistics

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast 4

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary Societies 4

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today 4

Translation amp Interpreting

SPD4346 Translation for the Media 4

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies 4

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting 4

SPD4568 Translation for Business and Commerce 4

Bilingual Communication

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication Workshop 4

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context 4

SPD4565 Communications in Greater China 4

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

^ Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

(c) Work-Integrated Education (WIE) Requirement

WIE is a work-based learning experience which takes place in an organisational

context relevant to a studentrsquos future profession or career or the development of

generic skills that will be valuable in the studentrsquos future career development Going

beyond studying within campus it allows students to learn from the outside world yet

at the same time contribute to the industry and or community

Students of this programme are required to complete 300 hours of WIE during their

study period Relevant work experience accumulated during or after sub-degree studies

8

may be recognised for fulfilment of WIE

Students will be provided with the WIE guidelines and be advised of the procedures

for recognition of prior work experience at programme commencement

1022 Exit Award

Students who have completed the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme of study with an ordinary degree of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) GUR (minimum 9 credits)

(b) DSR

All compulsory subjects except ldquoSPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies)rdquo (24 credits)

Any 4 elective subjects with at least 3 subjects at Level 4 (12 credits)

(c) WIE (non-credit-bearing)

(d) Having a GPA of 20 or above

For details please refer to Section 13112

9

103 Recommended Progression Pattern

All students are required to undertake 5 subjects in each semester without intermission

in order to fulfil the study requirements within the 2-year normal duration of study

They are also required to complete 300 hours of Work-Integrated Education within their

study period

Year amp

Semester

Subject Code and Title Subject

Nature

Year 1

Sem 1

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace C

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies C

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual Communication C

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 1

Sem 2

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese C

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions C

SPD3270 Analysis of English C

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural Themes C

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 1

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

GUR Subject GUR

Year 2

Sem 2

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies) C

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

Elective Subject E

C = Compulsory E = Elective GUR = General University Requirements

Remarks

1) The subject offering schedule is subject to change at the discretion of the School

2) For elective subjects priority in enrolment will be granted to students in that particular year of study

3) Offering of any elective subjects is subject to sufficient enrolment

4) Students who are required to take LCR subject(s) will be informed of the study schedule separately

These students are advised to consult the Programme Leader on their progression patterns should

they have any concerns on their study load taking into consideration the LCR subject(s) they are

required to take

10

104 Curriculum Mapping

Below is a mapping of subjects of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies

with reference to the programme intended learning outcomes The mapping focuses

on how each of the programme outcomes is introduced reinforced and assessed

Subject Code Subject Title Programme Intended Learning Outcomes

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Co

mp

uls

ory

Su

bje

cts

SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace I A R A I A

SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese I A R A I A

SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies I A I A I A

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions I A R A I A

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication I A I A

SPD3270 Analysis of English R A R A

SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes R A R A

SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry I A R A R A I A

SPD4557 Integrated Study (Bilingual

Studies) R A R A R A R A R A R A R A

Ele

ctiv

e S

ub

ject

s

SPD3225 Written English for Professionals R A R A

SPD3226 Spoken English for Professionals R A R A

SPD4337 English and Chinese in Contrast R A R A R A

SPD4346 Translation for the Media R A R A R A

SPD4468

Writing for Marketing and

Public Relations Purposes in

English

R A R A R A

SPD4556 Languages in Contemporary

Societies R A R A I A R A

SPD4558 Applied Translation Studies R A R A R A R A

SPD4559 Bilingual Communication

Workshop R A R A

SPD4563 Chinese Media in the Bilingual

Context R A R A R A

SPD4564 Classical Chinese for Today R A R A R A

SPD4565 Communications in Greater

China R A R A

SPD4566 Consecutive Interpreting R A R A R A

SPD4568 Translation for Business and

Commerce RA R A R A

Introduced (I) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is introduced in that subject Reinforced (R) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is reinforced in that subject Assessed (A) That the learning leading to the particular intended outcome is assessed in that subject

11

11 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction is English and Chinese (Cantonese and Putonghua when

spoken)

12 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS

The teaching learning philosophy underlying this programme is based on a holistic

diversified and flexible approach teaching students how to learn instead of what to

memorise and equipping them with the requisite skills required of a ldquolifelongrdquo learner

On the whole various teaching and learning strategies are adopted which are geared

to the needs and characteristics of the students

The teaching and learning activities are organised coherently according to the

programme learning outcomes subject nature the particular subject topics level of

difficulty and the integration among other components and subjects of the programme

A variety of teaching and learning methods will be used

The main form of teaching is through the use of interactive lectures supplemented

with tutorial exercises (such as case studies projects and presentations) and various

kinds of audio-visual aids Students also have the chance to gain exposure to

experiential learning self-directed learning case-based learning and problem-based

learning

Web-based teaching is another characteristic of the subjects of this programme It is

used to complement face-to-face teaching not only for encouraging studentsrsquo active

participation but also to encourage them to make use of websites for information

collection

To facilitate learning the subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new

concepts imparting knowledge but also act as facilitators to encourage students to

share their ideas and experience through class discussion case study oral presentation

and group activities

13 ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATIONS

131 Principles of Assessment

Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the

quality of student learning Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have

achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have

attained the overall learning outcomes of the programme at the end of their study at a

standard appropriate to the award Appropriate methods of assessment that align with

the intended learning outcomes are designed for this purpose The assessment methods

will also enable the teacher to differentiate studentsrsquo different levels of performance

within the subject Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning

activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks

12

Assessment will also serve as feedback to students The assessment criteria and

standards should be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to

facilitate student learning and feedback provided should link to the criteria and

standards Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their

progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement

132 Assessment Methods

Studentsrsquo performance in a subject is assessed by continuous assessment and or

examinations as deemed appropriate Where both methods are used the weighting of

each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in Section Two of this

document

To pass a subject a student must obtain a pass grade in both continuous assessment

AND examination if any Continuous assessment may include tests assignments

projects presentations and other forms of classroom participation depending on the

subject area Assignments which involve group work will nevertheless include some

individual components therein The contribution made by each student in continuous

assessment involving group effort shall be determined and assessed separately and

this can result in different grades being awarded to students in the same group

At the beginning of each semester the subject lecturer will inform students of the

details of the methods of assessments to be used within the assessment framework as

specified in this document

13

133 Grading

Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis A studentrsquos

overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows

Subject

Grade

Grade

Point

Short

Description

Elaboration on subject grading description

A+ 45 Exceptionally

Outstanding

The studentrsquos work is exceptionally

outstanding It exceeds the intended subject

learning outcomes in all regards A 4 Outstanding The studentrsquos work is outstanding It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in

nearly all regards

B+ 35 Very Good The studentrsquos work is very good It exceeds

the intended subject learning outcomes in most

regards B 3 Good The studentrsquos work is good It exceeds the

intended subject learning outcomes in some

regards

C+ 25 Wholly

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is wholly satisfactory It

fully meets the intended subject learning

outcomes C 2 Satisfactory The studentrsquos work is satisfactory It largely

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

D+ 15 Barely

Satisfactory

The studentrsquos work is barely satisfactory It

marginally meets the intended subject learning

outcomes D 1 Barely

Adequate

The studentrsquos work is barely adequate It

meets the intended subject learning outcomes

only in some regards

F 0 Inadequate The studentrsquos work is inadequate It fails to

meet many of the intended subject learning

outcomes

lsquoFrsquo is a subject failure grade whilst all others (lsquoDrsquo to lsquoA+rsquo) are subject pass grades

No credit will be earned if a subject is failed

14

134 Grade Point Average

There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below All of

them are capped at 40

1341 GPA (cumulative GPA)

Cumulative GPA is computed as follows

GPA =

n

n

ValueCredit Subject

ValueCredit Subject Point x GradeSubject

Where n = Number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to

and including the latest semester term For subjects which have been retaken

only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA

calculation

In addition the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation

(i) Exempted subjects

(ii) Ungraded subjects

(iii) Incomplete subjects

(iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved but without any grade

assigned3

(v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (ie those with the

code lsquoWrsquo)

A student who is absent from an examination will be given a fail grade the respective

subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as ldquozerordquo grade

point GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student for all

relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular point of time

GPA is an indicator of overall performance

1342 Semester GPA

Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above

except that only subjects taken in that semester including retaken subjects will be

included This Semester GPA will be used to determine studentsrsquo eligibility to

progress to the next semester alongside with the cumulative GPA However the

Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose

unless the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme

concerned and constitutes part of the graduation requirements

3 Subjects taken in PolyU or elsewhere and with grades assigned and for which credit transfer has

been approved will be included in the GPA calculation

15

1343 Weighted GPA

Along with the cumulative GPA a Weighted GPA will also be calculated to give an

indication to the Board of Examiners on the award classification which a student will

likely get if he she makes steady progress on his her academic studies

Weighted GPA will be computed as follows

n

n

i

i

W ValueCredit Subject

W ValueCredit Subject Point GradeSubject

GPA Weighted

where Wi = Weighting to be assigned according to the level of the subject

n = Number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in 1341

above except those subjects outside the programme curriculum GUR

subjects will be included

For calculating the Weighted GPA (and Award GPA) to determine the award

classification of students who satisfy the graduation requirements a standard

weighting will be applied to all subjects of the same level with a weighting of 2 for

Level 1 and 2 subjects and a weighting of 3 for Level 3 and 4 subjects This is also

applicable to the classification of ordinary degree exit award

1344 Award GPA

When a student has satisfied the requirements for award an Award GPA will be

calculated to determine his her award classification

If the student has not taken more subjects than required the Award GPA will be the

same as the Weighted GPA

Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken

on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account

in the Award GPA However if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional

subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he she

becomes eligible for award the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher

grade contribution shall be included in the Award GPA (ie the excessive subjects

attempted with a lower grade contribution including failed subjects will be

excluded)

135 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel

Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic

standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results SARP will review the

distribution of grades within a subject and finalise the grades at the end of each

semester before submission to the Board of Examiners (BoE) The BoE will not

attempt to change the grades SARP is also responsible for deciding the granting of

late assessment to students and the form of late assessment

16

SARP shall include the Director of SPEED or his her delegate the relevant subject

examiners and where appropriate the Programme Leader

136 Role of Board of Examiners

The Board of Examiners (BoE) shall meet at the end of each semester to review

studentsrsquo progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of

Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decision on

(a) the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the

programme

(b) de-registration cases and

(c) cases with extenuating circumstances

The BoErsquos membership should be composed of staff members associated with the

programme and some senior members The Chairman will normally be the Director of

SPEED

137 Academic Probation

If the cumulative GPA of a student is below 20 he she will be put on academic

probation in the following semester Once a student is able to pull his her cumulative

GPA up to 20 or above at the end of the semester the status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo

will be lifted The status of ldquoacademic probationrdquo will be reflected in the assessment

result notification but not in the transcript of studies

A student on academic probation will be required to take a reduced study load To

help improve the academic performance of the student the School will decide the

maximum number of credits to be taken by him her in the probation semester

138 Progression and De-registration

A student will have ldquoprogressingrdquo status unless he she falls within the following

categories any one of which shall be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the

programme

(a) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme

as specified in this document or

(b) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for two consecutive semesters

and his her semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 20 or

(c) the studentrsquos cumulative GPA is lower than 20 for three consecutive semesters

When a student falls within the categories as stipulated above the BoE shall de-

register the student from the programme without exception

Notwithstanding the above the BoE has the discretion to de-register a student with

extremely poor academic performance before the time frame specified in categories (b)

17

and (c) above if it is deemed that there is not much of a chance for the student to

attain a GPA of 20 at the end of the programme

139 Late Assessment

A student who has been absent from an examination or other assessment because of

illness injury or other unforeseeable reasons may apply to sit a late assessment

Permission is subject to the approval of SARP as late assessment is not an automatic

entitlement Should a late assessment be granted the actual grade attained will be

awarded

Late assessment for subjects normally shall take place before the commencement of

the following academic year (except for Summer Term which may take place within

3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results) Depending on the decision of

SARP late assessment may be arranged during the examination period of the

following semester term

Except with special approval students who have not yet completed the late

assessment for a subject which is the pre-requisite of another subject will not be

allowed to take the follow-on subject

1310 Retaking of Subjects

No re-assessment will be granted for students in all circumstances Students who

have failed a subject are required to retake the subject if it is compulsory for the

programme If the failed subject is an elective students may choose to retake the

subject or take another elective within the programme as replacement Retaking of

failed subjects or taking replacement subjects should be completed within the

maximum period of registration

Students may retake any subject (except GUR subjects which have been passed) for

the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval but they must

retake a compulsory subject which they have failed ie obtained an F grade Retaking

of subjects is with the condition that the maximum study load of 21 credits per

semester is not exceeded Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded

a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory

subject) and can only do so if places are available

The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted Only the grade obtained in the

final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for

originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the GPA Weighted

GPA and Award GPA If students have passed a subject but failed after retake credits

accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for

satisfying the credit requirement for award (The grades obtained in previous attempts

will only be reflected in the transcript of studies)

In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject the

fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA despite the passing

of the replacement subject

18

1311 Eligibility for Award

13111 Honours Degree Award

Students will be eligible for the PolyU-SPEED award of ldquoBachelor of Arts (Honours)

in Bilingual Studiesrdquo if they satisfy the conditions listed below

(a) Successful completion of at least 60 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1021 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1021 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy the respective conditions for

the award

13112 Ordinary Degree Award

Students who have fulfilled the following requirements may apply to exit the

programme with an ordinary degree award of ldquoBachelor of Arts in Bilingual

Studiesrdquo

(a) Successful completion of at least 45 credits including GUR and DSR as

specified under Section 1022 (a) ndash (b) and

(b) Completion of WIE as specified under Section 1022 (c) and

(c) Having a GPA of 20 or above

Applications for exit award should be submitted in writing to the School before the

start of the examination period of the semester concerned The School reserves the

right not to consider late application in the respective semester

To be eligible for the granting of the exit award students will be required to quit the

honours degree programme of study Re-admission of students who have obtained the

exit award to the same programme of study is not automatic and will be considered

only under exceptional circumstances

1312 Guidelines for Award Classification

13121 Honours Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the requirements for

Honours Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

19

Classification Guidelines

1st Class

Honours

The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered by

the programme

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 1)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding

2nd Class

Honours

(Division 2)

The student has reached a standard of performance attainment

judged to be satisfactory and clearly higher than the ldquoessential

minimumrdquo required for graduation

3rd Class

Honours

The student has attained the ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for

graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just

satisfactory

Under exceptional circumstances a student who has completed an Honours degree

programme but has not attained Honours standard may be awarded a Pass-without-

Honours degree A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended

when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the

ldquoessential minimumrdquo required for graduation with Honours from the programme in

question but when he she has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the

programme in an adequate fashion while failing to show sufficient evidence of the

intellectual calibre expected of Honours Degree graduates A Pass-without-Honours

is an unclassified award but the award parchment will not include this specification

13122 Ordinary Degree Award Classification

This section is applicable to students who have fulfilled the exit award requirements

and are allowed to exit the programme of study for Ordinary Degree

In using these guidelines for award classification the BoE shall exercise its

judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student and where

appropriate may use other relevant information The following are guidelines for

the BoErsquos reference in determining award classifications

Classification Guidelines

Distinction The studentrsquos performance attainment is outstanding and

identifies him her as exceptionally able in the field covered

by the programme

Credit The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than

outstanding

Pass The student has reached a standard of performance

attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory

20

1313 Appeals against Assessment Results

A student may appeal against the assessment results within 7 working days upon the

announcement of the results Any appeal should be directed to the Director of

SPEED in writing

Appeal against subject results may lead to a change in the subject grade which may

go upward or downward

1314 Academic Dishonesty and Disciplinary Actions

13141 For students who have been awarded a failure grade as a result of disciplinary action

a remark lsquorsquo will be recorded against the concerned subject failure grade denoting

ldquoDisqualification of result due to academic dishonestyrdquo The remark will appear on

the assessment result notification and transcript of studies until the students leave

the School

The remark will normally cover the following misconduct cases

cheating in assessment work tests or examinations

aiding academic dishonesty

plagiarism

violating rules governing the conduct of examinations that are related to possible

cheating

Students who have been recorded with the remark will also be subject to the penalty

of the lowering of award classification by one level upon graduation The minimum

of downgraded overall result will be kept at a pass

13142 Students who have committed disciplinary offences (covering both academic and

non-academic related matters) will be put on ldquodisciplinary probationrdquo normally for

one year and this will be shown on assessment result notification transcript of

studies and testimonial during the probation period until their leaving the School

For special cases which warrant heavier penalty the CPCE Student Discipline

Committee may specify a longer probation period

Students who have been put on disciplinary probation will be deprived of certain

privileges

13143 Other penalties may also be imposed on students who have committed academic

dishonesty and or disciplinary offences Details are specified on the SPEED

Student Handbook

1315 Exceptional Circumstances

Absence from an assessment component

If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to

illness or other circumstances beyond his her control and considered by the SARP

as legitimate the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete

21

the assessment and if so by what means

Aegrotat award

If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for

the award due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are

beyond his her control and considered by the BoE as legitimate CPCE will

determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award Aegrotat award

will be granted under very exceptional circumstances

A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either

to accept such an award or request to be assessed on another occasion to be

stipulated by the BoE the studentrsquos exercise of this option shall be irrevocable

The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him her from any

subsequent assessment for the same award

An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified and the award parchment shall

not state that it is an aegrotat award However the BoE may determine whether the

award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other

studentsrsquo academic performance

Other particular circumstances

A studentrsquos particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment

but not the standard of performance expected in assessment

1316 Other Regulations

Students of the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Bilingual Studies are bound by all

other regulations of PolyU PolyU SPEED

14 TAKING ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS AFTER GRADUATION

Students will be allowed to take additional subjects for broadening purpose in the

semester after they fulfil the graduation requirements However students will still

be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability

of places in the subjects concerned and their enrolment will be as subject-based

students only

After a student fulfils the graduation requirements in a semester he she may

continue to enrol as a subject-based student in the following semester only In the

case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme students

who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester 2 will be allowed to take

additional subjects in Semester 1 of the following academic year and not necessarily

during the Summer Term These students will be subject-based students only and

cannot use the results of the additional subjects to improve their GPA or Award GPA

Section Two

Subject Description Forms of

Discipline Specific Requirements

Subjects

Information on GUR subjects is available on the Student Portal (wwwspeed-

polyueduhkmySPEED)

22

Subject Code

SPD3189

Subject Title

Translation for the Workplace

Credit Value

3

Level

3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This course aims to equip students with skills in translating different

documents in the workplace from English to Chinese and vice versa

The main purposes are to enable students to understand the

translation theories and skills and be able to apply them in the

translation of workplace texts

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the general translation theories

b identify the formats of different workplace texts and

c apply the translation theories and skills in rendering different

workplace texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Translation theories strategies and skills

Translation process Peter Newmarkrsquos Semantic Translation and

Communicative Translation Yan Fursquos translation theories Xin Da

and Ya Formal Equivalence and Functional Equivalence

transliteration literal translation liberal translation addition

omission repetition rearrangement of words and expressions the

importance of context collocation and connotation and translation

of idioms and numbers

Formats of different workplace texts

Formats of different workplace texts such as notices official letters

memos promotional materials and minutes

Application of theories in translating different workplace texts

Translation of the different workplace texts mentioned above and

discussion of good and bad examples

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures should focus on translation theories and skills formats of

workplace texts and application of theories with in-class discussion

and practice

Tutorials are used to discuss studentsrsquo performance in assignments

and group presentations Good and bad examples are shown to

facilitate studentsrsquo understanding of how a document should be

translated

23

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments 20

3 Group assignments 10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

吳尚智 顏婉雲 amp 江偉萍 (2005) 中英實務寫作與翻譯手冊 香

港香港城市大學

許建平 (2008) 研究生英語實用翻譯教程 北京 中國人民大學

出版社

References

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版社

李明 張新紅 amp 李克興編 (2003) 商務英語翻譯 英譯漢 北京

高等教育出版社

24

許建忠 (2002) 工商企業翻譯實務 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

周兆祥 amp 範志偉 (2004) 財經翻譯精要 香港 商務印書館

陸國強 (2013) 漢譯英常用表達式經典慣例 上海 上海外語教

育出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

25

Subject Code

SPD3260

Subject Title Analysis of Modern Chinese

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help students to synthesise the concepts and

methodology they have accumulated in all the subjects in the

language and communication block in order to describe lexical

items phrases and sentence types of Modern Chinese systematically

Another purpose is to provide students with the necessary analytical

skills to recognise and compare regional varieties of Modern

Chinese especially in written genres Lastly this subject seeks to

enable students to apply the subject knowledge and generic skills

learned in this subject to other subjects on the programme and more

importantly in their future career in terms of both justifying their

understanding and to defend their interpretation of Chinese

sentences

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a apply the concepts of linguistics theories to describing and

analysing the structure meaning and actual usage of Modern

Chinese

b critically identify and evaluate variations in written Chinese

c develop critical and logical thinking through the application of

grammatical analysis of Modern Chinese and

d tackle intellectual problems from multiple perspectives

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Overview the formation of Modern Chinese

2 The sound system

3 The writing system(s)

4 Phrases and sentences

5 Words and word classes

6 Nominal structure

7 Subject-predicate structure

8 Verb-object and verb-complement structures

9 Serial verb construction

10 Passive and disposal constructions

11 Subordinative and coordinative structures

12 Regional varieties of Modern Chinese

26

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures are conducted interactively and hands-on exercises are

provided for the students to apply their analytical skills to solving

problems in Chinese grammar All assignments are designed to

provide students with tasks that require the evaluation synthesis and

application of syntactical and morphological concepts and

approaches to the critical analysis and discussion of Chinese

language

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 30

2 Presentation 10

3 Written report 20

4 Take-home test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed by an assignment a presentation a written

report and a final test The assignment is designed to test the

studentsrsquo ability to apply grammatical concepts to describe evaluate

and analyse Chinese forms and patterns The presentation and the

written report are for students to evaluate the literature critically and

to systematically analyse an issue in Standard Chinese The take-

home test is a summative assessment on important contents of the

subject

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Library search 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and reference 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

27

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

曹煒 2004《現代漢語詞匯研究》北京北京大學出版社

鄧思穎 2010《形式漢語句法學》上海上海教育出版社

符淮青 2011《現代漢語詞彙》香港 商務印書館(香港)有

限公司

葛本儀 2001《現代漢語詞彙學》濟南山東人民出版社

郭銳2002《現代漢語詞類研究》北京商務印書館

胡明揚 1996《詞類問題考察》北京北京語言學院出版社

李家樹陳遠止謝耀基 1999《漢語綜述》香港香港大學

出版社

劉叔新 2005 《漢語描寫詞匯學》(重排本)北京商務印書

陸儉明沈陽 2004《漢語和漢語研究十五講》(第二版)北

京北京大學出版社

呂叔湘等著 2010《語法研究入門》(第五版)北京商務印

書館

馬真 1997《簡明實用漢語語法教程》北京北京大學出版

人民教育出版社中學語文室 1984《中學教學語法系統提要》

(試用)

邵敬敏主編 2007《現代漢語通論》(第二版)上海上海教

育出版社

邢福義 1998《漢語語法學》長春東北師範大學出版社

邢福義 2001《漢語複句研究》北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

28

Subject

Code

SPD3261

Subject

Title

Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Credit

Value

3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-

requisite

Co-

requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject provides an introduction to bilingual studies covering the three

major sub-areas of the programme namely linguistics translation amp

interpreting and bilingual communication It also provides a schema as to

how these three sub-areas work together under the overarching area of

bilingual studies Lastly it puts bilingual studies in the language context of

Chinese and English and the community context of Hong Kong

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a have a general grasp of bilingual studies

b have an understanding of the three sub-areas of bilingual studies

namely linguistics translation amp interpreting and bilingual

communication

c embark on deeper and more concrete studies in the 3 sub-areas

d apply the general principles of bilingual studies to the Chinese-English

context

e apply Chinese-English bilingual studies to Hong Kong and

linguistically similar communities

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language

a What is language

b Analysing Language

c Language in Society

d Languages in the World

2 Bilingualism in linguistics and beyond

a Bilinguality

b Societal bilingualism

c Bilingualism and biculturalism

3 Translation and interpreting

a Bridging two worlds

b Translation

c Interpreting

4 Bilingual communication

a Language switch by a bilingual

29

b Language choice in a bilingual community

c Relation between two language varieties

5 Chinese-English bilingual studies

a English as a world language

b Varieties of Chinese

c Hong Kong as an arena

Teaching

Learning

Methodolo

gy

In addition to face-to-face lectures and small group tutorials online

discussions (via Moodle E-learning System) and other computer-assisted

teaching methods will also be used with the help of multimedia (audio and

video) teaching materials Assignments closely related to the real-life use of

language will be given to help student solve language problems

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Take-home

exercises 5

2 Test 1 40

3 Test 2 40

4 Group

project 15

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject lecturer

subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

Two tests will be administered during the semester which will aim to test

the studentsrsquo mastery of basic linguistic knowledge and problem solving

skills In addition students will also be required to conduct research in

groups on a certain linguistic topic in order to further their understanding of

the subject knowledge

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Reading and on-line study 58 Hrs

Preparing for tests 20 Hrs

Group project 10 Hrs

Total student study effort 127 Hrs

30

Reading

List and

References

Recommended Book Reference

For part (a)

Fromkin V Rodman R and Hyams N (2013) An Introduction to

Language (10th ed) Boston WadsworthCengage Learning

For other parts

Relevant reading materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time

when they are deemed appropriate

31

Subject Code SPD3262

Subject Title Interpreting for the Professions

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to train students to undertake simple

interpreting tasks This subject aims to help students build a

foundation for the development of essential skills in interpreting

between English and Chinese and vice versa It also uses ample

examples to familiarise students with the principles recurrent issues

and difficulties in interpreting guiding them along from an

introduction to fundamental communication issues in interpreting

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a distinguish the differences between translation and interpreting

b analyse and paraphrase the meaning in the source language

c acquire the skills of active listening and concentration

d acquire fundamental techniques and strategies essential to

interpreting and

e be able to perform interpreting tasks on topics from general areas

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- interpreting vs translation

- development of interpreting

- functions and features of different forms of interpreting

- quality assessment of interpreting

2 Codes of ethics

- fidelity

- confidentiality

- impartiality

3 Fundamental skills for interpreting

- active listening

- memory retention

- comprehension

- paraphrasing

- delivery

4 Drills of interpreting

- sight translation

- liaison interpreting

- short consecutive interpreting

32

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be delivered on a step-by-step basis Trainings on

fundamental skills of interpreting such as listening memorising

paraphrasing and delivering will be given to students at different

learning stages depending on the progress of students Given the

skill-based nature of the subject students will undertake in classes a

number of exercises that are designed to train specific interpreting

skills usually after teacherrsquos demonstration Peer evaluation and self

critiques will be used in order to take learners further into the

concepts skills and techniques

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz-1 10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 Quiz-2 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Assessments are conducted regularly on a progressive manner

Assessment criteria include accuracy of delivery cohesion of

delivery intelligibility of delivery clarity of delivery and class

participation

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises

outside class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing

interpreting assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

33

Reading List and

References Recommended Books References

Gile Daniel (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and

Translator Training John Benjamins Publishing Company

Jones Roderick (1998) Conference Interpreting Explained

Manchester St Jerome Publishing

Mason Ian (1999) Dialogue Interpreting Ian Mason St Jerome

Publishing

周兆祥 (1999)《口譯的理論與實踐》商務印書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

34

Subject Code SPD3263

Subject Title Introduction to Bilingual Communication

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

In Hong Kong it is a common practice especially in the corporate world

that the same message has to be presented in the appropriate language to

readers andor audiences who are either Chinese monoglots or English

monoglots or Chinese-English bilinguals This mode of communication

is not a form of translation and interpretation because it does not involve

a source message Besides communicative norms vary across languages

and between monolingual and multilingual contexts In this age of

globalisation where corporate functions are often done in more than one

language and involve personnel from more than one culture bilingual

communication could be a key to success in the corporate world This

subject together with SPD4559 attempt to prepare students for this

mode of communication in the workplace Specifically the focus of this

subject is to develop in students a grip on the conceptual resources

related to bilingual communicative norms and the conduct and content of

bilingual communication especially its integrated form

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a come to grips with the norms and principles of conducting

language-mediated communication in an age of globalisation

multilingualism and multiculturalism

b develop a communicative sense concerning when and where

monolingual norms or bilingual norms be used

c have a general idea about linguistic varieties and how this concept

relates to bilingual communication in corporate contexts

d the impact of the global spread of bilingualism and globalisation on

corporate communication

e how the emergence of bilingual varieties of communication relate to

the aforementioned developments

35

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 conceptual resources underpinning an understanding of bilingual amp

cross-cultural communication

2 conduct amp content of bilingual communication

3 code choice in corporate communication in multilingual

metropolises

4 cross-lingual variation in communicative norms

5 bilingual mode of oral amp written communications in the private

sector

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Matter that provides a conceptual grounding for the subject will be

delivered in a number of lectures Attempts to develop studentsrsquo grip of

these concepts will be made via in-class exercises

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 In-class written

exercises 25

2 In-class oral

exercises 25

3 Quiz 20

4 Subject report 20

5 Attendance amp

participation 10 NA

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Practices and Exercises 35 Hrs

Reading and Writing 35 Hrs

36

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

37

Reading List

and References Recommended (Introductory)

Bilbow G T (1996) Business speaking for Hong Kong Hong Kong

Longman Asia Ltd

Coastal Training Technologies Corporation (2002) Communications

intelligence Business etiquette Carlsbad CA CRM Learning

Luke K K amp Theodossia-Soula P (Eds) (2002) Eds Telephone

calls Unity and diversity in conversational structure across languages

and cultures Amsterdam J Benjamins

Marconi J (2004) Public relations The complete guide Singapore

Thomson

Schultz M Hatch M J amp Larsen M H (Eds) (2000) The

expressive organisation Linking identity reputation amp the corporate

brand Oxford Oxford University Press

Scholte J A (2000) Globalisation A critical introduction

Basingstoke Macmillan

Recommended (Advanced)

Gudykunst W B (2004) Bridging differences Effective intergroup

communication (4th

ed) Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G (2001) Cultures consequences Comparing values

behaviors institutions and organisations across nations (2nd

ed)

Thousand Oaks California Sage Publications

Hofstede G Hofstede G J amp Minkov M (2010) Cultures and

organisations Software of the mind (3rd

ed) New York McGraw-Hill

References

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

中文資料

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2012) 現代漢語詞典 香港商

務印書館(香港)有限公司

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典 北京 商務印書館

吳光華主編 (2003) 新漢英辭典 上海 上海交通大学出版社

徐斌主編 (2003) 現代應用文寫作全書 西安 三秦出版社

張立民等編 (1994) 英漢對照應用文大全 南京 江蘇科學技術出版

楊正寬 (2002) 應用文 臺北 楊智文化事業股份有限公司

38

劉俊平 (2014) 應用文實戰手冊 先修班 臺北 三民書局股份有限

公司

蔣磊 (2000) 英汉習語的文化觀照与對比 荊州 武汉大学出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

39

Subject Code SPD3270

Subject Title Analysis of English

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject has the aim of acquainting the students with the structural

properties of the English language in a systematic way Context-related

properties will also be discussed so as to enable students to understand

the internal structures of the language through its use in real life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a demonstrate understanding of the basic structures of English and

their formation processes

b demonstrate that they grasp the basic techniques in segmenting and

representing the major structural patterns in English

c generalise and apply such knowledge and skills to the analysis of

newly-encountered English data

d develop critical and logical thinking

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Lexical Aspects

- Words and lexemes word categories

- Analysing English words base stem root affix morpheme and

its realisations inflection and derivation

- Word formation processes in English

2 Sentential Aspects

- Categories and structures of sentences clauses and phrases

- Phrases and their main characteristics head and dependents NP

DP AdjP AdvP PP VP

- Inflectional forms of verbs tense aspect mood

- Canonical and non-canonical clauses subject predicate

predicator object complement adjunct

- Sentence patterns and their graphic representations

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject diverges from traditional approaches because it adopts a

data-driven context-oriented perspective in analysing the structural

properties of English

40

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Test-1 20

2 Test-2 20

3 Test-3 20

4 Final test 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed through four tests which will assess the studentsrsquo

understanding of the grammatical theories taught and their ability to

apply such knowledge to the analysis of authentic English data

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 80 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

Reading List

and References

Main Textbook

Huddleston Rodney and Geoffrey K Pullum (2005) A Students

Introduction to English Grammar Cambridge University Press

References for Further Study

Burridge Kate and Jean Mulder (1998) English in Australia and New

Zealand Oxford University Press

Carter Ronald Rebecca Hughes and Michael McCarthy (2000)

Exploring Grammar in Context Cambridge University Press

Coates Richard (1999) Word Structure Routledge

Gelderen Elly van (2010) An introduction to the grammar of English

41

John Benjamins Publishing Company

Leech Geoffrey and Jan Svartvik (2002) A Communicative Grammar of

English [The Third Edition] Longman

McCrum Robert William Cran and Robert MacNeil (2003) The Story

of English [The Third Edition] Penguin Books

Tallerman Maggie (2015) Understanding Syntax [The Fourth Edition]

New York RoutledgeTaylor amp Francis Group

Yule George (1998) Explaining English Grammar Oxford University

Press

陸國強 (1999)《現代英語詞彙學 ( 新版 )》 [Modern English

Lexicology the Revised Edition]上海外語教育出版社

章振邦 (1997) 《新編英語語法》(A New English Grammar) 上海外

語教育出版社第三版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

42

Subject Code SPD4553

Subject Title English for Chinese Cultural Themes

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives To fulfil the English part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University by brushing up the use of

English for Chinese cultural themes

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a explain key features of Chinese culture in English

b use English as an effective tool for communication on various

Chinese cultural themes (eg traditional Chinese art literature

and philosophy)

c have an informed understanding of such communication

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Principles for expressing in English Chinese culture loaded ideas

11 Fidelity vs recipient-friendliness

12 Means of re-presentation

121 Paraphrase

122 Annotation

123 Interpretation

124 Translation

125 Other means

2 Romanisation for Chinese and its pronunciation in English

21 Wade-Giles transliteration system

22 Mandarin Romanisation

23 Cantonese Romanisation

24 Pronunciation in English

3 Chinese-English glossaries in select areas

31 Chinese philology

32 Chinese society and politics

33 Chinese art and literature

34 Chinese religion

35 Chinese philosophy

36 Other areas

4 Essay-writing in the above select areas

43

TeachingLearning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in highly interactive seminars so that

major Chinese issues and cross-cultural issues will be sufficiently

addressed In order to well expound the essential principles of the

subject (eg paraphrase interpretation annotation etc) case studies

and hands-on work will be supplemented under guidance of the

teacher whereas the assignments and in-class tests are designed to

encourage studentsrsquo active participation as well as to help develop

their critical thinking and writing ability

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Oral presentation 20

2 Essay writing

35

3 Attendance amp

class

participation

5

4 In-class tests 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References Main Readings

Chao YR 1969 ldquoDimension of Fidelity in Translation With Special

Reference to Chineserdquo Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 29 109-

130

Chao YR 1956 ldquoChinese Terms of Addressrdquo Linguistic Society of

America 32 (1) 217-241

Deeney John J 1995 ldquoTranscription Romanisation

Transliterationrdquo in Chan Sin-wai amp David E Pollard eds An

44

Encyclopedia of Translation Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1085-1107

Jin Di amp Nida Eugene 1984 On Translation Beijing China

Translation amp Publishing Corporation

Zhang Longxi 2010 ldquoThe Complexity of Differences Individual

Cultural and Cross-Culturalrdquo Interdisciplinary Science Reviews

35(3-4) 341-252

References for Further Study

Chan Wing-tsit 1973 A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy (4th

printing) Princeton Princeton University Press

Hodge B amp Kam Louie 1998 The Politics of Chinese Language

and Culture The Art of Reading Dragons New YorkLondon

Routledge

Introductions to Chinese Culture (30 vols) Cambridge amp New York

Cambridge University Press 2011

Kung-chuan Hsiao 1979 A History of Chinese Political Thought

New Jersey Princeton University Press

Quick References

DeFrancis John 2000 ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive

Dictionary Honolulu University of Hawaii Press

Hucker Charles O 1985 A Dictionary of Official Titles in Imperial

China Stanford Calif Stanford University Press

Kleeman Julie amp Yu Harry 2010 Oxford Chinese Dictionary

Oxford Oxford University Press

Journals

China Quarterly

China Journal

Early China

Journal of Chinese Religions

Journal of Chinese Studies

Modern China

Philosophy East amp West

Trsquooung Pao

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

45

46

Subject Code SPD4554

Subject Title Chinese and Bilingual Academic Inquiry

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese (with English)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives This subject aims to introduce students to the basic principles

strategies techniques and tools for Chinese and bilingual academic

inquiry and problem solving with emphasis on Chinese and bilingual

academic reading writing and information handling in support of

language-based academic and professional work This subject also

fulfils the Chinese part of the Discipline-Specific Language

Requirement (DSLR) of the University

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a apply effective strategies and skills to academic reading and

writing in Chinese and bilingual contexts

b benefit from various resources both traditional and IT-oriented

for Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

c evaluate select and deploy effectively IT tools for information

retrieval and data processing to support Chinese and bilingual

academic inquiry and problem solving

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Orientation

- Language and culture

- Language and society

- Academic enquiry in a bilingual context

- To be academically inquisitive in a bilingual context

2 Intake of ideas in a bilingual context

- To read effectively

- Notes making as an aid to idea reception

3 Information handling in the bilingual context

- retrieval

- assessment

- classification and sorting

- further processing

4 Chinese and bilingual academic resources

- Traditional

- IT related

- Multi-media and hyper-media

47

5 IT tools for Chinese and bilingual information processing

- E-dictionaries and e-encyclopedias

- WWW and online library information retrieval

- Word-processing with the help of Microsoft Office

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be conducted in interactive seminars supported with

computer-mediated demonstrations Class participation in the form of

continuous input by students will be encouraged to simulate problem

solving and solution enhancement environments

Online tutorial on academic integrity will facilitate studentsrsquo

self-learning at their own pace through a link within this subject

at moodlecpce-polyueduhk

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method task

Weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Quiz 40

2 Homework 60

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject is assessed entirely through coursework consisting of two

quizzes and three pieces of homework Homework requires the

students to locate and solve a practical problem of academic inquiry

via making educated uses of whatever resources available The quizzes

are meant to consolidate the studentsrsquo basic understanding and skills in

Chinese and bilingual academic inquiry

Online Tutorial on Academic Integrity

To help students understand the importance of academic honesty and

learn ways to ensure that their work and behaviour at SPEED are

acceptable in this regard the Online tutorial on Academic Integrity is

included in this subject Students will need to complete the Tutorial

by Week 5 The Online Tutorial is part of the subject completion

requirement Students who fail to complete the Online Tutorial will

fail this subject

For students who have completed the Online Tutorial in another

subject they can be exempted from this requirement Proof of

48

completion (ie e-Certificate) is required

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Online tutorial on academic integrity 1 Hr

Readings and study 78 Hrs

Total student study effort 118 Hrs

Reading List and

References In Chinese (sorted in Pinyin)

费夫贺马尔坦 (李鸿志译) 《印刷书的诞生》 桂林 廣西師範

大學出版社 2007

羅樹寶 《說書 從獸骨到紙張的文字行旅》 台北 商周出版

2007

林玉山《工具書學概論》 廣州 廣東教育出版社 2004

王寧鄒曉麗 《工具書》 香港 和平圖書有限公司 2003

楊承運肖東發編 《北大學者談讀書》 北京圖書館出版社

2000

余嘉錫 (1884-1955) 《目录学发微 〈含古书通例〉》 北京 中

国人民大学出版社 2004

In English

Baez Benjamin and Boyles Deron The Politics of Inquiry Education

Research and the ldquoCulture of Sciencerdquo New York University of

New York Press 2009

Bergmann L S Academic Research and Writing Inquiry and

Argument in College Boston Longman 2010

Dunne M Pryor J and Yates P Becoming a Researcher A

Companion to the Research Process Maidenhead Open University

Press 2005

Flower L Learning to Rival A Literate Practice for Intercultural

Inquiry New Jersey Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc

Herring J E The Internet and Information skills A Guide for

Teachers and School Librarians London Facet Publishing 2004

Lester J D Writing Research Papers A Complete Guide (11th

ed)

New York Pearson Longman 2005

Long L and Long N Computers Information Technology in

Perspective Upper Saddle River Pearson Education Prentice Hall

2005

49

Lu Tonglin ldquoTransnationalism and Glocalisation in Chinese

Language and East Asian Cinemasrdquo China Review Vol 10 No 2

Fall 2010 1-14 (httpcupcuhkeduhkojsindexphpChinaReviewarticleviewFile24543404search= )

Lvovich N The Bilingual Self Inquiry into Language Learning

(PhD dissertation) Ohio Union Institute 1995

Nunan D and Choi Julie Language and Culture Reflective

Narratives and the Emergence of Identity New YorkLondon

Routledge 2010

Web Resources

中国语言文字网 httpwwwchina-languagegovcn

粵語審音配詞字庫

httphumanumartscuhkeduhkLexislexi-can

重編國語辭典修訂本

http1401113446newDictdictindexhtml

異體字字典 http140111140mainhtm

Chinese Character Dictionary汉字字典

httpwwwchinalanguagecomdictionariesccdict

《重訂標點符號手冊》修訂版與試用版內容對照表

httpwwwedutwfilessite_contentM0001haushioupdf

OneLook Dictionary Search httpwwwonelookcom

Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science

httplucomodlisaboutcfm

Google Scholar

httpscholargooglecom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

50

Subject Code SPD4557

Subject Title Integrated Study (Bilingual Studies)

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge

Indicative Area Subject Title

Bilingual Studies SPD3261 Introduction to Bilingual Studies

Translation amp

Interpreting SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace

SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Linguistics SPD3260 Analysis of Modern Chinese

SPD3270 Analysis of English

Bilingual

Communication

SPD3263 Introduction to Bilingual

Communication

DSLR+

English SPD4553 English for Chinese Cultural

Themes

DSLR+

Chinese SPD4554 Chinese and Bilingual Academic

Inquiry +

Discipline-Specific Language Requirement subject

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject offers students an opportunity to integrate and apply

their language skills and knowledge of bilingual studies acquired on

the programme Students are expected to develop their critical

thinking skills by working independently to plan manage produce

and evaluate a detailed piece of work in one semester This subject

will provide studentsrsquo opportunities to evaluate and reflect critically

on their chosen area of study

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a identify a theoretical framework or model or practical problem

for investigation and study

b apply the language theories and knowledge of bilingual studies

acquired in the programme

c evaluate and reflect critically on the chosen topic and its

implications

d present findings recommendations andor results in a clear and

effective manner

51

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Students may choose to adopt different approaches for this

Integrated Study Some suggestions are as follows

1) Literature Review Approach students can discuss and analyse a

theoretical model or framework and conduct a critical review of

the literature in a particular area related to bilingual studies

OR

2) Practical Approach students can synthesise and apply what they

have learnt to manage a project based on an analysis of a

perceived need of a real business non-profit making

organisation

Other approaches are possible subject to the PEG approval

TeachingLearning

Methodology

A detailed project guideline will be provided to help the students

Each student will then be assigned to a supervisor who will provide

guidance throughout this project Specific consultation hours will

be arranged to facilitate students in this project Students are

required to develop and define a topic in consultation with the

supervisor submit a proposal and a progress report and at the end

submit a final report

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The project will be assessed on the basis of proposal progress report

(including discussion and consultation with supervisor) and final

report

Assessment of proposal and progress report will focus on the

formative aspect of student performance and is appropriate for

intended outcomes 1 and 2 The final report accounts for 70 of

assessment and assessment is based on all four intended outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 100

1 Proposal 15

2 Progress report

(including discussion and

consultation with

supervisor)

15

3 Final report 70

Total 100

52

Student Study

Effort Expected Lecturer-student contact

Workshops 6 Hrs

Consultationsupervision 25 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 120 Hrs

Total student study effort 1285 Hrs

Reading List and

References

References

Anderson J amp Poole ME (2002) Assignment and thesis writing

(4th

ed) Milton John Wiley amp Sons

Babbie E (2012) The practice of social research (13th

ed)

Cengage Learning

Bryman A (2011) Business research methods Oxford amp New

York Oxford University Press

Creswell J W (2007) Qualitative inquiry and research design

Choosing among five approaches (2nd

ed) Thousand Oaks CA

Sage Publications

Creswell J W (2008) Research design Qualitative

quantitative and mixed methods approaches (3rd

ed) Thousand

Oaks CA Sage Publications

Davis K A (1995) Qualitative theory and methods in applied

linguistics research TESOL Quarterly 29(3) 427-453

Doumlrnyei Z (2007) Research methods in applied linguistics

Oxford Oxford University Press

Doumlrnyei Z (2010) Questionnaires in second language research

Construction administration and processing (2nd

ed) New

York NY Routledge

Harmon C (2000) Using the internet online services and CD-

ROMs for writing research and term papers (2nd

ed) New York

amp London Neal-Schuman

Kumar R (2005) Research Methodology A step-by-step guide

for Beginners (2nd

ed) SAGE Publication

Merrigan G (2004) Communication Research Methods

Belmont CA WadsworthThomson Learning

Polonskey M J (2005) Designing and Managing a Research

53

Project A Business Studentrsquos Guide Thousand Oaks CA SAGE

Ruane J M (2005) Essentials of Research Methods A Guide to

Social Science Research Malden MA Blackwell

Silverman D (2013) Doing qualitative research A practical

handbook London SAGE

Zikmund W (2003) Business research methods (7th

ed) South-

Western of Thomson Learning

Additional papers and books relevant to the studentrsquos specific

project topic will be identified by the student or recommended by the

supervisor

54

Subject Code SPD3225

Subject Title Written English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build studentsrsquo competencies in

professional written English It is designed to enable students to

write in a crisp efficient professional style that gets the required

results by focusing on the readerrsquos needs and minimising any

chances of misunderstanding

Secondary objectives are to expand studentsrsquo range of language and

to improve accuracy tone and cohesion

Modern Professional Style will be analysed practised and mastered

to gain the benefits of precision of expression enhanced

relationships and accountability

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will be able to

a analyse their readersrsquo needs and select information accordingly

b write concisely and without ambiguity of message

c create a positive impression through improved accuracy and

tone

d accomplish demanding writing tasks within desired timeframes

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo written English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

organisation and coherence

toneappropriacy

55

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Part 1 Modern Professional Style for Email

Effective vs ineffective written communication

Being able to apply key principles and techniques of Plain English

Developing an awareness of the needs of the reader Critically

comparing the features of effective and ineffective written texts

Creating a reader-friendly document

Making key information stand out frontloading key information

using vertical lists and using parallel structure

Modern Professional Style

Using key principles and techniques such as conciseness and an

appropriate register (neutral style vs informal style)

Developing an appropriate tone

Creating a sincere professional image through vocabulary

selection grammatical voice and positive tone

Genre specific patterns

Recognising and applying appropriate patterns for a variety of

purposes particularly

Dealing with enquiries

Discussing and agreeing terms

Expressing dissatisfaction

Responding to customer problems

Linguistic range and accuracy

Being better able to select appropriate vocabulary and control

grammatical accuracy Being able to identify and correct common

errors in written texts

Part 2 Modern Professional Style for Reports

Applying the appropriate techniques from Part 1 to short reports

and proposals Being able to effectively select and organise relevant

information in order to write a well organised reader friendly report

or proposal

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the professional written English

Step 2 Students analyse texts and - with guidance - discover key

language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

56

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy tone

conciseness etc

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methods tasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Communicating with

colleagues or customers 20

2 Short report or proposal 30

Examination (BULATS

Writing Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate in written English in a business

context The tasks also indirectly address in terms of content For

example the assessed tasks may require students to synthesise

business information from different functional units of an

enterprise discuss how best to deal with an ethical dilemma facing

an enterprise andor use their global outlook to decide the best way

to deal with a business-related communication task

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

Each of the three assessment tasks allow the SILOs to be assessed

The assessed tasks are however different from each other in that

they elicit from students a range of relevant text types eg

responding to an enquiry expression dissatisfaction asking a

colleague for clarification writing a short marketing report etc

Each task is designed to elicit a representative sample of language

from which studentsrsquo range accuracy organisation coherence

and tone appropriacy can be assessed Task completion will also

be assessed written communication often has a specific objective

and whether or not a text achieves its objective needs to be

considered in awarding grades for communicative ability

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

57

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly between the formative tasks

and the BULATS Writing Test but the core underlying language

skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Books References

Ashley A (2000) A handbook of commercial correspondence

Oxford Oxford University Press

Brock SL (2003) Better business writing techniques for

improving correspondence (4th

ed) Menlo Park CA Crisp

Learning

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Oxford

Macmillan

Bilbow Grahame T (2004) Business writing for Hong Kong (3rd

ed) Hong Kong Longman

Holt R D Grigor amp N Sampson (2004) Email International

business correspondence for all occasions Hong Kong

Macmillan

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Pile L (2004) E-mailing Addlestone UK DELTA Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

58

Subject Code SPD3226

Subject Title Spoken English for Professionals

Credit Value 3

Level 3

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Intermediate level English language skills

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for

studentsrsquo reference of the scope of basic knowledge required for this

subject

Objectives

This subject is designed to build a broad awareness of and develop

the spoken English communication skills that are increasingly

needed to achieve successful outcomes in a range of fairly

demanding work-related situations

This is a task-based subject in which students encounter a range of

simulated professional situations focussed on problem solving and

presentations The contexts are designed to provide opportunities to

introduce analyse and practise a range of functional language (eg

the language of negotiating options promising action clarifying

meaning etc) with particular attention to tone and register A

secondary objective is to expand studentsrsquo professional vocabulary

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing this subject students will have the

language skills to be able to do the following in a professional and

appropriate manner

a establish a professional relationship in an appropriate manner

b contribute to and if necessary manage a problem-solving

meeting in a professional and appropriate manner

c present themselves their ideas and the products and services of

a company or organisation

d negotiate in a professional and appropriate manner

The above will include attention to and feedback on a range of

studentsrsquo spoken English skills

range of language

grammatical accuracy

pronunciationstressintonation

discourse management

interactive communication skills

59

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Communicating in Groups

Functional language for

contributing to meetings (eg asking for and giving opinions

dealing with interruptions clarifying etc)

managing meetings (eg setting objectives asking for

clarification keeping to the point summarising etc)

problem-solving (eg stating options balancing arguments

changing your approach etc)

decision making (eg making a suggestion expressing doubt

stating future action etc)

Presenting Persuasively

Functional language and communication techniques for

Laying solid foundations the start the finish signposting

Powerful techniques eg repetition rhetorical questions the

rule of three

Being positive and dramatic power words amp convincing

language storytelling and anecdotes

Handling questions paraphrasing questions answering

strategies

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This is a task-based course typically involving a four-step teaching

and learning approach

Step 1 Students are exposed to authentic and semi-authentic

models of the target language in realistic professional

contexts

Step 2 Students analyse audiovideo recordings and transcripts

and with guidance-discover key language features

Step 3 Students practise key language features in a range of

controlled and freer practice activities

Step 4 The teacher provides feedback on studentsrsquo language use

highlighting successful communication and areas

requiring more attentionpractice This may involve a

remedial focus on grammatical accuracy pronunciation

etc

60

Assessment Methods

in Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

method tasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d

Continuous

Assessment

50

1 Three- way problem-

solving discussion 25

2 Individual

presentation 25

Examination

(BULATS Speaking Test) 50

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Programme Intended Learning Outcome (PILO)

All three assessment tasks directly address PILO by assessing

studentsrsquo ability to communicate more effectively and efficiently in

professional spoken English in a business context

Subject Intended Learning Outcomes (SILOs)

The three assessment tasks allow each of the 4 SILOs to be

assessed at least twice Each task is designed to elicit a

representative sample of language from which studentsrsquo range

accuracy discourse management pronunciation stress

intonation and interactive abilities can be assessed

These 5 criteria are measured on a 5-point scale and arranged in a

set of descriptors

Criteria and descriptors vary slightly from one assessed task to

another depending on the exact skill-set to be assessed but the core

underlying language skills are very similar

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact 39 Hrs

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

As this is a language skills subject it does not require extensive

academic reading but rather extensive exposure analysis and

practice Students may find the following sources useful

Recommended Books References

Allison J amp P Emmerson (2007) The business intermediate

studentrsquos book with DVD ROM Oxford Macmillan

Centre for Professional and Business English (2002) Business

61

English kit for HK executives common errors business writing

amp social English Hong Kong Economic Times

Duckworth M (2005) Oxford business English dictionary for

learners of English Oxford Oxford University Press

Emmerson P (2002) Business grammar builder Macmillan

Oxford UK

Mascull Bill (2002) Business vocabulary in use intermediate

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull Bill (2004) Business vocabulary in use Advanced

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

McCarthy M et al (2009) Grammar for business Cambridge

Cambridge University Press

Murphy R (2012) English grammar in use with answers A self-

study reference amp practice book for intermediate students of

English (4th

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Online Resources

General

BBC Learning English

wwwbbccoukworldservicelearningenglishgeneral

Presentations

Presentation Magazine wwwpresentationmagazinecom

PolyU ELC

httpelcpolyueduhkcillpresentationsordering_questionhtm

Podcasts

Business English Pod wwwbusinessenglishpodcom

English Pod wwwenglishpodcom

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

62

Subject Code SPD4337

Subject Title English and Chinese in Contrast

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (Chinese is used only when a Chinese term is referred to)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Linguistic Knowledge in English and Chinese would be helpful for

deeper understanding of this course

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This is a comprehensive linguistic course highlighting the

differences between English and Chinese through a linguistic

study of both It aims to develop studentsrsquo awareness of the

contrastive linguistic differences and similarities in Chinese and

English With daily examples students should be able to identify and

analyse critically the structures and functions of these languages and

apply the subject knowledge to solve linguistic problems encountered

in professional and workplace discourses and in daily communication

situations This subject will also encourage studentsrsquo examination of

the intercultural linguistic difference between the east and the west as

well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China region

essential to translation and other integrated use of English and

Chinese for professional communication

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a recognise the significance of contrastive analysis in professional

communication

b develop an understanding of the linguistic differences and

similarities between Chinese and English

c identify and analyse critically the structures and functions of these

languages

d apply the subject knowledge to the explanation of linguistic

phenomena encountered in professional discourses and in day-to-

day communication situations

e examine the intercultural difference between the east and the west

as well as the intra-cultural differences within the Greater China

region linguistically essential to translation and other integrated

use of English and Chinese for professional communication

63

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

Overview of Contrastive Analysis

Introduction to contrastive analysis in linguistics function and

importance of contrastive analysis in linguistics evolution of and

philosophies behind the Chinese and English languages

Linguistic Differences and Similarities between Chinese and

English

Fundamental Linguistic characteristics of English and Chinese

contrastive study of English and Chinese phonetics and phonology

word formation morphology grammar syntax semantics

Cross-cultural Translation and Communication

Translation skills (order form structure) language of respect and

humanity face politeness conventional cognition of English and

Chinese

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Lectures will introduce and explain the principles and various

approaches to contrastive language studies with specific reference to

examples drawn from the greater China region and the English-

speaking countries wherever appropriate and invite sharing of

observations through group discussion

Tutorials provide students the opportunity to deepen their

understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to understand the

linguistic differences and similarities between Chinese and English as

well as cultural differences in Chinese and English through tutorial

exercises student presentations and group discussions

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Group project with

individual components 35

2 Mid-term test 15

3 Participation and in

class work 10

Examination 40

Total 100

64

Student Study

Effort Expected Class contact

Lecture 26 Hrs

Tutorial 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbooks

Yule G (2010) The study of language (4th

ed) UK Cambridge

University Press

潘文國 (2013) 漢英語言對比概論 北京 商務印書館

References

Chen D (2011) Contrastive linguistics between Chinese and

English Beijing Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press

Hatim B (1997) Communication across cultures Translation theory

and contrastive text linguistics Exeter Exeter University Press

Nida E A (1993) Language culture and translating Shanghai

Shanghai Foreign Language Education

Snell-Hornby M (2001) Translation studies An integrated

approach Amsterdam John Benjamins

何善芬 (2002) 英漢語言對比研究 上海 上海外語敎育出版社

卉君 (1993) 漢語基本知識 香港 商務印書館

黃伯榮 amp 廖序東 (2011) 現代漢語 北京 高等教育出版社

金惠康 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

李德津 amp 程美珍 (2008) 外國人使用漢語語法 (修訂本) 北京

北京語言大學出版社

蕭立明 (2010) 英漢比較硏究與翻譯 上海 上海外語敎育出版

陳定安 (1997) 英漢比較與翻譯 香港 商務印書館

王武興 (2003) 英漢語言對比與翻譯 北京 北京大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

65

Subject Code SPD4346

Subject Title Translation for the Media

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior Knowledge Basic knowledge in SPD3189 Translation for the Workplace or

equivalent

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject introduces to the students the features and practices of

the media industry in Hong Kong and important concepts and

techniques in the translation of media documents including news

reports magazine articles web pages etc It provides sufficient

practice to help students acquire hands-on experience and essential

skills to develop expertise in media translation

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject students will be able to

a outline the features and practices of the media industry in Hong

Kong

b analyse different formats and styles of English and Chinese

media texts and

c form and apply appropriate approaches and strategies for

translation tasks of different media texts

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

Features and Practices of Media Industry in Hong Kong

Todayrsquos media Functions of the mass media Fundamental

considerations of media translation Tasks of a media translator

Characteristics of Media Language

Nature of media language Semantic level Syntactic level Rhetoric

level Features of English and Chinese media writings

Translation Skills Approaches and Strategies for Media

Documents

Transliteration literal translation liberal translation and combined

translation Addition omission repetition reversion and

rearrangement of words and expressions Balance of accuracy

fluency and expressiveness Adapting editing and re-writing texts

Translation for Printed Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of printed

media writings including news reports magazine articles editorials

etc

66

Translation for Electronic Media

Translation strategies and approaches for different types of

electronic media writings including TV and radio broadcast

internet etc

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of translation

theories and concepts with specific reference to different media

documents wherever appropriate Group discussions are arranged

regularly Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen

their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply

the theories in practice The activities in tutorials normally include

discussion practice and presentation related to both the source text

and the target text of media documents

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c

Continuous Assessment 60

1 Mid-term test 20

2 Individual assessments (eg

test reflective journal case

study)

20

3 Group assignments (eg

project report research

paper)

10

4 Class participation 10

Examination 40

Total 100 Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

67

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

There is no prescribed textbook This is a dynamic course which

mainly involves current media documents in Hong Kong Lecture

summary and supplementary notes may be distributed from time to

time

References

Ho W K (2001) Media translating In An Encyclopedia of

Translation Chinese-English eds Chan Sin-wai amp David E

Pollard (pp 651 ndash 657) Hong Kong The Chinese University Press

Itule BD amp Anderson DA (2007) News writing and reporting

for todayrsquos media (7th

ed) New York McGraw Hill

McLoughlin L (2000) The language of magazines London

Routledge

Reah D (2002) The language of newspapers (2nd

ed) London

Routledge

朱伊革 (2007) 英語新聞的語言特點與翻譯 上海 上海交通大

學出版社

李德鳯 (2009) 新聞翻譯 原則與方法 香港 香港大學出版

金惠香 (2003) 跨文化交際翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯出版公司

許明武 (2003) 新聞英語與翻譯 北京 中國對外翻譯

康照祥 (2005) 媒體識讀 臺北 揚智文化

端木義萬 (2000) 傳媒英語研究 北京 中國社會科學出版社

廖柏森 (2007) 新聞英文 閱讀與翻譯技巧 臺北 眾文圖書公

鄭寶璿 (2004) 傳媒翻譯 香港 香港城巿大學出版社

賴蘭香 (2012) 傳媒中文寫作 香港 中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

68

Subject Code SPD4468

Subject Title Writing for Marketing and Public Relations Purposes in English

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Prior

Knowledge

Marketing Management and Public Relations

This is not a pre-requisite subject requirement and is only for studentsrsquo

reference of the scope of basic knowledge for this subject

Objectives This subject stresses the importance for marketing and PR

professionals to communicate effectively to their target audiences

It equips students with the essential conceptual and analytical skills to

enable them to write a range of effective marketing and PR materials in

English which observe common textual conventions used by

professional marketing and PR writers

The primary focus is on creating effective advertisingpromotional

copy and effective media releases as these are the most common ways

of reaching a target audience Students will also become acquainted

with other text types including backgrounders brochures and broadcast

scripts

Recent technological changes are covered to give students an

understanding of how technology has impacted written communication

skills in the marketing and PR industries

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this subject students will be able to

a identify the intended public and the nature of various media in

planning and writing marketing and PR text

b apply marketing and public relations writing skills to produce

effective promotionaladvertising copy and press releases that reach

their target audience with the desired effect

c recognise and understand legal and ethical problems associated

with marketing and public relations writing and adjust writing style

to avoid these and

d proofread a range of marketing and public relations texts to

improve accuracy by identifying a range of common grammatical

errors

69

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

The subject develops studentsrsquo awareness of how a range of effective

marketing and PR texts are constructed and helps them develop their

own professional writing skills to produce texts with similar features

It uses genre analysis to analyse the lsquomovesrsquo used by effective

marketing and PR writers in a range of markets and media and

provides many opportunities for students to produce and critically

evaluate their own texts

PART 1 Before you Start Writinghellip

a) Setting communication objectives

Adopting a problem-solution mindset

Defining your target audience

Defining what you want your writing to achieve

b) Considering legal and ethical issues

Defamation

Privacy

Inclusiveness

Gender-neutral writing

lsquoGreenwashrsquo

PART 2 Writing Copy that Sells

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful promotionaladvertising texts

Getting the readerrsquos attention and holding it

Writing from the readerrsquos point of view

Putting human benefits before features

Identifying your USP

Establishing your credibility

Showing that the value exceeds the price

Telling the reader what to do next

Giving the reader a reason to act now

Creating a compelling headlinetagline

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic promotionaladvertising

texts in different media

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in promotionaladvertising

texts written by Chinese L1 writers

PART 3 Writing Successful Media Releases

a) Key lsquomovesrsquo of successful media releases

Identifying a strong news angle

Getting the story into the lead paragraph

Adding high-impact quotes

Creating a compelling headline

Maintaining an objective and neutral tone

b) Critical evaluation of a range of authentic media releases

c) Analysis of common linguistic errors in media releases written by

Chinese L1 writers

70

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The approach to teaching and learning will incorporate

a) guided discovery

b) skills development in focused tasks and

c) opportunities for students to demonstrate individually their

improved competence

Class time will focus on a discovery-based approach in which students

through guided analysis of model texts will critically evaluate a range

of successful (and occasional unsuccessful) marketing and public

relations copy to identify key features

Students will go on to develop their ability to incorporate these

features into their own writing apply their understanding by

synthesising a range of writing techniques and skills to produce

effective texts of their own in group and individual writing activities

There will be a balance between group work and individual

participation Group work will prepare students to work effectively

with other team members Individual writing tasks and other tasks will

develop a sense of personal responsibility for the quality of their own

communication

Students are expected to read widely on the subject The lecturer will

direct students to one or more specific articles that consolidate and

expand the skill(s) that have been covered that week Alternatively

students may be expected to read some of the theoretical material

before class and come to class already informed of key principles

There is no distinction between lectures and tutorials for this subject

71

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject

learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d

Continuous Assessment 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Final Examination 50

1 Producing effective

advertising copy

20

2 Producing an effective

press release

20

3 Editingproofreading task

marketing OR PR copy

10

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to approval of the School Programme Committee

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lessons 39 Hrs

Self-study and class preparation 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Recommended Textbook

The material is based on the work that the Centre for Professional and

Business English (CPBE) of PolyU carries out with organisations and

working adults in Hong Kong Students will receive the core course

material in two in CPBE-written modules

Part A Writing Copy that Sells

Part B Writing PR Copy

72

References

Aronson M Spetner D amp Ames C (2007) The Public Relations

Writers Handbook The Digital Age 2nd Edition San Francisco

JosseyBass

Bivins T H (2013) Public Relations Writing The Essentials of Style

and Format 8th

Edition McGraw-Hill

Bly RW (nd) The Fundamentals of Persuasive Writing Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwblycomPagesdocumentsTFOPWhtml

Farrall C and Lindsley M (2008) Professional English in Use

Marketing Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Harrington J (2015) RIP press releases hello integration and

goodbye PR Welcome to the future of our industry Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwprweekcomarticle1366952rip-press-

releases-hello-integration-goodbye-pr-welcome-future-industry

Hayden CJ (2009) Increase Your Signal-to-Noise Ratio Retrieved 15

December 2015 from wwwgetclientsnowcomsignal-to-noise-

ratiohtm

Makepeace C (2009) How to Create a Killer Ad Retrieved 15

December 2015 from

wwwmakepeacetotalpackagecomarchiveshow-to-create-a-killer-ad

Rich C (2012) Writing and Reporting News 7th ed Belmont

California Wadsworth

Ross K (2015) How to Write a Press Release in One Easy Lesson

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from wwwkayrosscompress-

releasehtml

Ross K (2015) Why Should I Visit Your Website - And Why Should I

Stick Around Retrieved 15 December 2015 from

wwwkayrosscomwhy-websitehtml

Schermerhorn M (2005) Writing Great Website Sales Copy

Retrieved 15 December 2015 from httpezinearticlescomWriting-

Great-Website-Sales-Copyampid=36763

Scott DM (2013) The New Rules of Marketing amp PR How to Use

Social Media Online Video Mobile Applications Blogs News

Releases and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly Hoboken NJ

John Wiley amp Sons

Smith R D (2008) Becoming a Public Relations Writer A Writing

Process Workbook for the Profession 3rd ed Routledge

73

Swain JW amp Swain KD (2014) Effective Writing in the Public

Sector Armonk USA Routledge

Whitaker W R Ramsey J E and Smith R D (2012) Media writing

print broadcast and public relations 4th ed New York Routledge

Wilcox D L (2012) Public Relations Writing and Media

Techniques 7th ed Pearson

Yopp J J and McAdams K (2014) Reaching Audiences a Guide to

Media Writing 6th ed Boston Allyn amp Bacon

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

74

Subject Code SPD4556

Subject Title Languages in Contemporary Societies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English (with Chinese)

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The purpose of this subject is to help the students to understand the

social nature of language to be keenly aware of the product and process

of languages in contact and cross-language influence in the accelerated

globalising society and to be able to apply the sociolinguistic knowledge

learned in class to analyse and evaluate language use in various social

and cultural contexts

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a Articulate the social nature of language and the role of language in

both reflecting and constructing a speakers social identity

b Acquire acute awareness and understanding of the dynamics of

language variation and change in multilingual and multicultural

societies

c Appraise critically language-related issues and exercise critical

judgment in evaluating language use in various social and cultural

contexts

d Apply sociolinguistic knowledge to describe and explain the

phenomena of human interaction the students encounter

e enhance critical thinking in the course of study a theoretical subject

socio-linguistics

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism by virtue of a deeper

understanding of language use in cosmopolitan multi-lingual cities

like Hong Kong

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Language and social identity

2 Bilingualism and diglossia

3 Societal multilingualism

4 Code-mixing and code-switching

5 Linguistic variation and change

6 Language culture and thought

7 Register genre and style

8 Language and internet development

9 New Media Literacy

75

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

Theory and practice will be fully integrated throughout the subject In

addition to the provision of key concepts of the subject and guidance on

applications highly interactive seminars are designed to encourage

active participation from the students in classroom discussion

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Quiz 20

3 Term paper 40

4 Class participation 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed by presentation quiz and term paper While

the quiz assesses the studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general

nature the presentation and term paper will involve applying the

conceptual resources learned in the subject to describe critically

evaluate and explain some samples of language use in society Besides

the participation tutorial encourages the students to participate actively

in discussion and critically responds to the teacher and fellow classmates

in academic debates

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Supervised studies group work 35 Hrs

Library search fieldwork own research 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

76

Reading List and

References Aitchison Jean and Diana M Lewis (ed) 2003 New Media

Language London Routledge

Auer Peter (ed) 2007 Style and Social Identities Alternative

Approaches to Linguistic Heterogeneity New York Mouton de

Gruyter

Bonvillain Nancy (2014) Language culture and communication

the meaning of messages [The Seventh Edition] Upper Saddle

River NJ Pearson

Claika Elaine 1994 Language The Social Mirror (3rd Ed) Heinle

amp Heinle

Deborah Tannen and Anna Marie Trester (ed) 2013 Discourse 20

language and new media Washington DC Georgetown University

Press

Eckert Penelope amp Sally McConnell-Ginet 2013 Language and

Gender [The Second Edition] Cambridge University Press

Fasold Ralph 1996 The Sociolinguistics of Language Oxford

Basil Blackwell

Holmes Janet 2013 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics [The

Fourth Edition] Longman

Wardhaugh Ronald (2015) An Introduction to Sociolinguistics

[The Seventh Edition] Chichester John Wiley amp Sons Inc

Stockwell Peter 2007 Sociolinguistics A Resource Book for

Students Routledge

教育部語言文字信息管理司組編《中國語言生活狀況報告》

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 北京商務印書館

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

77

Subject Code SPD4558

Subject Title Applied Translation Studies

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to produce students who understand the factors

involved in communication across two languages who have an

awareness of the different levels of meaning in a text who can use this

awareness to evaluate both source texts and their translations who

have an awareness of basic issues concerning translation as a

profession It will also assist students to examine texts and analyse the

linguistic and sociolinguistic issues underlying communication across

cultures

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a understand linguistic and cultural issues in translation

b analyse texts from the point of view of a translator

c identify translation problems in relation to syntax lexis function

and cultural issues to classify them and to find solutions

d translate texts of various types using appropriate strategies and

procedures

e become thinking translators

f students are expected to develop the ability of critical thinking and

cultural appreciation

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 introduction- what translation studies does

2 science of translationmdashlinguistic approach to translation

3 dynamic equivalence

4 type reader translator strategy (functionalist approach)

5 text analysis in translation

6 translation procedures

7 translation of metaphor

8 translation of terminology

9 cultural issues in translation

10 multilingualism in a monolingual text

11 translation in the context of bilingualism and biculturalism

78

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in lectures and seminars Assignments

will be designed to provide tasks which encourage and develop critical

analysis and evaluation as well as encourage and develop the

discussion of their own work and existing translations

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 One paper 80

2 Class

participation

amp paper-conducting

20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject will be assessed in the form of essays describing

translation problems encountered by the students using theories learned

in class and readings and analyse existing translations

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Peter Newmark A Textbook of Translation (New York Prentice Hall

1988) Eugene A Nida ldquoDynamic Equivalence in Translationrdquo in An

Encyclopaedia of Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press

1995) pp223-230

Jin Di ldquoEquivalent Effect in Translationrdquo in An Encyclopaedia of

Translation (Hong Kong Chinese University Press 1995) pp231-234

Roman Jakobson ldquoOn Linguistic Aspects of Translationrdquo Theories of

Translation eds Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet (Chicago and

London University of Chicago Press 1993) pp 144-151

Marilyne Rose ldquoTranslation Types and Conventionsrdquo Translation

Spectrum ed Marilyne Rose (Albany State University of New York

Press 1981) pp31-40

Katharina Reiss ldquoText Types Translation Types and Translation

79

Assessmentrdquo Readings in Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman

(Helsinki Oy Finn Lectura Ab 1989) pp106-115

Juliane House ldquoTranslation Quality Assessmentrdquo Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 157-161

Christiane Nord Translation as a Purposeful Activity St Jerome

(1997)

Marrlyne Rose ldquoTime and Space in the Translation Process in

Translation Spectrum pp 1-7

Vinay amp Darkelnet ldquoTranslation Proceduresrdquo in Readings in

Translation Theory ed Andrew Chesterman (Helsinki Oy Finn

Lectura Ab 1989) pp 61-69

Jin Di amp Eugene Nida On Translation 中國對外翻譯出版公司

1984

JC Catford A Linguistic Theory of Translation Oxford Univ Press

1965

孫述宇金聖華《英譯中》香港中文大學校外進修部

1975

張培基等《英漢翻譯教程》上海瓦與教育出版社2007

譚載喜《新編奈達論翻譯》北京對外翻譯出版公司1999

劉靖之ldquo重神似不重形似rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店

1989) pp1-15

羅新璋 ldquo我國自成體系的翻譯理論rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港商務

印書館1989) pp1-19

林語堂 ldquo論翻譯rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp32-47

趙元任ldquo論翻譯中信達雅的信的幅度rdquo《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店 1989)pp48-63

陳西瀅 ldquo論翻譯 rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版社

1989)pp 400-408

曾虛白ldquo翻譯中的神韻與達rdquo《翻譯論集》(北京商務出版

社 1989)pp 409-416

80

傅雷ldquo翻譯與臨畫 mdash《高老頭》重譯本序rdquo 《翻譯論集》(香

港三聯書店1989) pp 68-69

傅雷關於翻譯的通信《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 70-78

錢鍾書ldquo林紓的翻譯rdquo《翻譯論集》(香港三聯書店1989)

pp 302-332

黃宣範ldquo翻譯的語言基礎rdquo《翻譯與語意之間》(台北聯經出

版事業公司1993)pp217-242

《翻譯季刊》香港翻譯學會

《中國翻譯》中國翻譯者協會

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

81

Subject Code SPD4559

Subject Title Bilingual Communication Workshop

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

The aim of this subject is to achieve better co-ordination and

integration for the learning of Chinese (including Putonghua) and

English among the students and to better prepare students for

professional environments where the two written codes and three

spoken languages will be either simultaneously interchangeably or

integratively used It is believed that such environments are the

norm in both the private and public sectors of Hong Kong and that

graduates from this programme will be expected to assume as

executives the role of linguistic brokers or intermediaries in these

environments

This subject focuses on enhancing studentsrsquo biliterate and trilingual

skills as well as integrated bilingual communication via a lsquolearning

by doingrsquo approach whereas SPD3263 focuses on developing

studentsrsquo grip on the conceptual resources related to bilingual

communicative norms and the conduct and content of bilingual

communication especially its integrated form

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be

a knowledgeable of the types and features of bilingual

communication in both the private and public sectors

b skilled in parallel drafting of documents in both Chinese and

English and in integrated forms of bilingual communication

c able to conduct a range of acts of verbal and non-verbal

communication such as speech opening amp closing

complimenting amp toasting informational probing amp querying

criticising amp self-defending in a professional manner in cross-

cultural and professional contexts

d bilingual norms of language-mediated communication

e communicative norms of inter-cultural communication

f rhetorical tasks involving queries critique ampor lobbying

82

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 making amp defending a case in both Cantonese Putonghua amp

English

2 conducting parallel case documentation in both Chinese and

English

3 making queries in Cantonese Putonghua and English

4 conducting integrated bilingual communication

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive workshop mode

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks~

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to

be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Three oral

exercises 55

2 Two written

exercises 35

3 Feedback

given as a

consultant^

10

Total 100

~ Most of the tasks are to be conducted in class Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

As an advocate (25) as a fact-finder (10) as a critic (20)

^ Consultant is a role-play position in the simulated class exercises The role

of the consultant in class exercises is to offer helpful suggestions to other

players for improvement This part of assessment is a minor class work

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Guided Supervision 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Preparation amp Practices 35 Hrs

Writing Exercises 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

83

Reading List and

References References

Argenti P (2007) Corporate communication (4th

ed) New York

NY McGraw-HillIrwin

Chalkley A B (1996) Longman handy (English-Chinese) guide to

business amp economic terms Hong Kong Longman

Chaney LH amp Martin JS (2014) Intercultural business

communication (6th ed) Upper Saddle River NJ PearsonPrentice

Hall

John Sinclair (Eds) (2011) Collins Cobuild English dictionary for

advanced learners Bishopbriggs Glasgow HarperCollins

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Advanced (2nd

ed)

Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Mascull B (2010) Business vocabulary in use Intermediate (2nd

ed) Cambridge Cambridge University Press

中國社科院語言研究所詞典編輯室 (2016) 現代漢語詞典 香港

商務印書館

中國社會科學院語言研究所 (2011) 新華字典(第 11 版) 北京

商務印書館

公務員事務局法定語文事務署 (2004) 政府公文寫作手冊(第

二版) 香港 香港特區政府

香港理工大學中文及雙語學系 (2010) 理大實用中文寫作手冊

香港 香港理工大學中國語文教學中心

陸谷孫(2008)英漢大詞典 上海上海譯文出版社

經濟日報出版社 (2002) 中國商務應用文書手冊 香港 經濟日

報出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

84

Subject Code SPD4563

Subject Title Chinese Media in the Bilingual Context

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject presents and explores issues of bilingualism and

multiculturalism in Chinese media practice in the accelerated globalising

and pluralistic societies of today utilising conceptual resources from

bilingualism and discourse analysis The students are encouraged to

reflect and generalise the use of language and languages in media

discursive practice and to apply and extend their creative and critical

thinking capacity as well as their bilingual knowledge and skills through

analysing and practicing different media genres in Hong Kong and the

related Cultural China regions

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire a good understanding of the sociocultural and

sociolinguistic characteristics of Chinese media in Hong Kong and

its related Cultural China regions

b appraise critically language-related issues of media communication

in the accelerated globalising and digitalising world

c develop further bilingual knowledge and skills with an appropriate

usemix of signs styles and symbols for Chinese media production

in a pluralistic society

d develop critical and creative thinking via analysing and producing

different media products in Hong Kong and the related Cultural

China region

e develop integrated biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened

awareness and appreciation of the multilingual and multicultural

mix in Hong Kong and the related Cultural China regions

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 Globalisation localisation and the development of Chinese media

2 Orality and literacy in Chinese media

3 New words and formation in Chinese media

4 Codemixing and codeswitching in Chinese media

5 Intertextuality and hybridity in Chinese media

6 Stylistic variations and changes in Chinese media

7 Signs and Symbols in Chinese media

8 Ideology and image transformation in Chinese media

85

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

The subject will be divided into lectures and seminars Lectures will

cover the major themes in the broadest form while seminars will

concentrate on the special topics andor case studies A combination of

various exercises including presentation class discussion and media

work production will be utilised to maximise the learning outcomes for

the students Tutorial sessions will be arranged to assist students to

complete their assignments satisfactorily

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes

to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation 20

2 Class

participation 15

3 Media

production 45

4 Quiz 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Student Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Seminars 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings amp Discussion 30 Hrs

Writing amp problem-solving tasks 50 Hrs

Total student study effort 119 Hrs

86

Reading List

and References

Baran Stanley J 2007 Introduction to Mass Communication Media

Literacy and Culture (Updated 4th ed) New York McGraw-Hill

Chan K J W Walls and D Hayward 2007 (ed) East-West

Identities Globalisation Localisation and Hybridisation Boston

Brill

Craig T J and R King 2002 Global Goes Local Popular Culture in

Asia Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Li David CS 1996 Issues of Bilingualism and Biculturalism A Hong

Kong Case Study New York Peter Lang

Lee CC JM Chan Z Pan and CY K So 2002 Global Media

Spectacle News War over Hong Kong New York State University of

New York Press

Machin D amp T V Leeuwen 2007 Global Media Discourse A

Critical Introduction New York Routledge

Meinhof U amp J Smith 2000 Intertextuality and the Media From

Genre to Everyday Life New York Manchester University Press

Wu D D (ed) 2008 Discourses of Cultural China in the Globalising

Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Lee Francis L F (2014) Talk radio the mainstream press and public

opinion in Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

王建華主編 2006《資訊時代報刊語言跟蹤研究》杭州浙

江大學出版社

吳東英 許謙文 2000 方言變異還是語體變異 內地與香港娛

樂新聞的語篇差異分析《中國語文》第一期35-41頁

吳東英秦秀白吳柏基2004香港報刊語言口語化的表現形

式和功能《當代語言學》 第3期248-256頁

俞旭郭中實黃煜主編(1999)《新聞傳播與社會變遷》香

港中華書局

鄭慶君 2007《手機短信中的語言學》長沙湖南大學出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate

87

Subject Code SPD4564

Subject Title Classical Chinese for Today

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to help our student to break the language barrier that

prevents them to access the civilisation of Ancient China recorded in the

textual forms It enables students to acquire reading ability in Classical

Chinese by adopting the principled systematic approach devised by Wang

Li and his team at Peking University to the acquisition of Classical

Chinese on the part of undergraduate students The essence of this

approach is the division of teaching materials into three parts namely (1)

texts (2) basic vocabulary (3) grammatical patterns and relevant

knowledge with a strong sense of striking a balance between maximising

the utility of each of these three parts and integrating the three as far as

practicable

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Students are expected to be able to

a acquire sufficient vocabulary to understand Classical Chinese

b acquire the basic grammatical features that are commonly found in

Classical Chinese

c make use of dictionaries and reference works that are instrumental

in studying Classical Chinese source material

d generalise and apply the knowledge acquired to comprehend newly-

encountered texts

e translate Classical Chinese into modern Chinese

f appreciate the historical developments of Chinese language

g relate the classical texts to the cultural historical philosophical and

social evolutions in China

h develop critical and logical thinking through learning Classical

Chinese in a systematic manner

i acquire life-long learning skills through the application of

dictionaries and reference works in the study

j enhance the appreciation of traditional Chinese civilisation

including culture history and philosophy

k identify the influences of traditional Chinese civilisation on the

contemporary world

l have a better sense of historic-national identity and responsibility

88

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

A Selected Texts

1 Pose Zuozhuan (左傳) Mencius (孟子) Lunyu (論語)

Zhuangzi (莊子) Xunzi (荀子) Han Fei Zi (韓非子)

Zhanguoce (戰國策) Sun Zi (孫子兵法) Shiji (史記)

Hanshu (漢書)

2 Poem Shijing (詩經)Chuci (楚辭)Tangshi (唐詩)

Songci (宋詞)

B Vocabulary

1 The basic meanings and the extended meanings of the

lexical items found in the selected text

2 The synonyms and related words of the lexical items

3 The semantic change of the lexical items in the history of

Chinese language

C Grammatical features

1 Sentence types and their markers

2 Passive versus active sentences

3 Lexical categories Pronouns Connectives prepositions

adverbs and particles

4 The functional shift of lexical categories in Classical

Chinese

5 Word Order in Classical Chinese

D Relevant Knowledge

1 Major dictionaries and reference works in studying

Classical Chinese

2 The metrical patterns in poems and verses

3 The family names and personal names in Ancient China

4 The official titles Ancient China governments

5 The rituals and festivals of Ancient China

6 The astronomical calendar adopted in Ancient China

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to lectures provided by the subject teacher students will be

required to apply the taught skills to solve problems in understanding

Classical Chinese on their own Critical discussion on the different

commentaries and annotations of the selected texts will be held

Presentations on the socio-cultural aspects of Ancient China will also be

required

89

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment

with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Continuous

Assessment

50

Examination 50

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the subject

lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme Committee

The subject will be assessed by assignments and examination The take-

home assignments assess the respective knowledge and skills for the subject

while the final examination assesses studentsrsquo vocabulary size

comprehension ability and translation skills of Classical Chinese

Student

Study

Effort

Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self studies 60 Hrs

Course work (total 3) 9 Hrs

Total student study effort 108 Hrs

Reading

List and

References

王力主編2006《古代漢語》(校訂重排本)一至四冊北京中華

書局

張世祿2004《古代漢語教程》(修訂版)上下冊上海復旦大學

出版社

王力1984《談談學習古代漢語》濟南山東教育出版社

王力編2000《王力古漢語字典》北京中華書局

王政白1992《古漢語同義詞辨析》合肥黃山書社

楊伯峻何樂士2001《古漢語語法及其發展》(修訂本)北京

語文出版社

村夫向東1985《古漢語語法手冊》太原山西人民出版社

周振甫2004《怎樣學習古文》北京中華書局

張中行2007《文言津逮》北京中華書局

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials

will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed

90

appropriate

91

Subject Code SPD4565

Subject Title Communications in Greater China

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

Greater China is a political plurality and is multicultural with policies

and practices of communications varying from polity to polity This

subject will provide students with a survey and understanding of the

social and media characteristics and the communicative norms that are

essential for interpreting evaluating and designing corporate

communication materials related to media relations in the region

Conceptual resources from global communication and cross-cultural

competence will be utilised with the hope to further develop the

studentsrsquo multilingual sensitivity and their multicultural competence

which should help them better adapt to their future professional life

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a articulate the social systems and the characteristics of persuasive

communication in the Greater China region

b articulate the media systems and characteristics that are relevant

to media relations management in the region

c evaluate the appropriateness and effectiveness of the language for

persuasion in the region based on their acquired knowledge of the

communicative norms and variations within the region

d plan design and produce integrated materials for public

communication campaigns and managing publicity for the

corporation

e broaden outlooks with enhanced knowledge and understanding of

the linkages and differences in the Greater China region

f enhance biliteracy and trilingualism with heightened awareness

and performance in using different Chinese varieties and styles in

relation to the context of the region

Subject

Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 The emergence of the concept Greater China and its constituents

2 Governmental policies and practice of communications in Greater

China

3 Public opinions and corporate image management in Greater

China

4 External corporate communications in Greater China

interpersonal dimension

5 External corporate communications in Greater China media

systems and practice

92

Teaching

Learning

Methodology

In addition to attending lectures and tutorials students are provided with

tasks that require survey evaluation and comparison as well as practice

of various forms of corporate communication and of managing

interpersonal and media relations for the corporation in the region

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e f

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Presentation

oral quiz 20

2 Problem set 40

3 Quiz 20

4 Participation

tutorial 20

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The presentation oral quiz allows the students to demonstrate their

understanding of lecture content and provides them with an opportunity

to deal with a special topic within the subject in depth The problem set

will involve applying the conceptual resources learned from the subject

to 1) critically evaluate and justify the suitability of persuasive

communication(s) in Greater China 2) critique the existing approaches

and construct an alternative model for persuasive communication in the

region andor 3) plan and design materials for effective public

communication campaigns in the region While the quiz assesses the

studentsrsquo grip of the subject matter of a general nature the students are

also encouraged to participate actively in class by discussing with their

fellow classmates in the QampA session after the presentation oral quiz

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Readings and Discussion 35 Hrs

Writing and Problem-solving Tasks 35 Hrs

Total student study effort 109 Hrs

93

Reading List

and

References

Lu Xing Wenshan Jia and D Ray Heisey (ed) 2002 Chinese

Communication Studies Contexts and Comparisons Westport CT Ablex

Publishing

Miller Dan P amp Robert L Heath 2004 Responding to Crisis A Rhetorical

Approach to Crisis Communication Mahwah NJ Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Publishers

Magala Slawomir (ed) 2005 Cross-cultural Competence London

Routledge

McPhail Tomas L 2006 Global Communication Theories Stakeholders

and Trends Malden MA Blackwell Publishing

Rawnsley Gary D and Ming-Yeh T Rawnsley (ed) 2003 Political

Communications in Greater China New York RoutledgeCurzon

Stiff James B and Paul A Mongeau 2003 Persuasive Communication

New York The Guiford Press

Wu Doreen D (ed) (2008) Discourses of Cultural China in the

Globalising Age Hong Kong Hong Kong University Press

Yu Bin (ed) 1996 Dynamics and Dilemma Mainland Taiwan and Hong

Kong in a Changing World New York Nova Science Publishers

陳國明主編 2004《中華傳播理論與原則》五南圖書出版股份有限

公司

胡泳ldquo在互聯網上營造公共領域rdquo《現代傳播》2010 年第 1 期

单业才编著 2007 《企业危机管理与媒体应对》北京 清華大學出

版社

林景新著 2009《网络危机管理》廣州暨南大學出版社

劉建明 2006 《新聞發布概論》北京 清華大學出版社

張海洋 2006《中國的多元文化與中國人的認同》民族出版社

翟學偉 1994 《面子 人情 關係網》河南人民出版社

翟学伟 2011 《中国人的脸面观 形式主义的心理动因与社会表

征》 北京大学出版社

朱海松 2010 《网络的破碎化传播传播的不确定性与复杂适应

性》中国市场出版社

單波石義彬劉學 2011《新闻传播学的跨文化转向》上海交通

94

大學出版社

石国亮 2012《新媒体时代公关案例》 研究出版社

黎佩兒 2012《香港傳媒-新聞自由與政治轉變》天地圖書出版

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading materials will

be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they are deemed appropriate

95

Subject Code SPD4566

Subject Title Consecutive Interpreting

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Pre-requisite SPD3262 Interpreting for the Professions

Objectives

This subject is designed to consolidate the basic interpreting skills

learnt in ldquoSPD3262 Interpreting for the Professionsrdquo and further

develop studentsrsquo interpreting abilities by training them to be able to

undertake consecutive interpreting (CI) tasks on general topics in

the workplace In this subject students will learn some essential CI

skills such as active listening note-taking and oral presentation to

behave professionally in CI Practice will focus on CI tasks on

various topics between Chinese (MandarinCantonese) and English

Intended Learning

Outcomes

On successfully completing the subject students will be able to

a master the basic skills and strategies essential to CI

b recognise the specific requirements of an interpreting task

c make adequate preparation for a CI task

d apply CI to a wide variety of situational uses

e undertake interpreting tasks in the workplace

Subject Synopsis

Indicative Syllabus

1 Basic concepts of interpretation

Functions and features of different types of interpretation

Criteria for good interpretation

Professional ethics and practice

2 Skills for CI

Note-taking skills

Improvisation skills

Public speaking skills

Sight translation skills

TeachingLearning

Methodology

Classes will be conducted in a language laboratory in an interactive

mode Speech recordings on current affairs will be used in classes as

training materials to keep students updated on latest events to

widen their vocabulary and to enrich their repertoire of expressions

In addition audio and video recordings of professional interpreters

will be shown in order to expose learners to different interpreting

styles Students will also be asked to research on interpreting

assignments that cover a variety of topics on current local and

international issues Through class discussion students are guided to

develop self-evaluation and peer-evaluation skills

96

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended Learning

Outcomes

Specific

assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c d e

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Class

participation and

performance

10

2 Mid-term quiz 30

3 After-class

practice 20

4 Final quiz 40

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

The subject adopts formative assessment method Specifically

students will be assessed through a series of quizzes in the course of

learning These quizzes will be conducted at different learning

stages to assess studentsrsquo performance under pressure and to

evaluate studentsrsquo progress of learning CI from Chinese (mainly

Cantonese) to English and English to Chinese (mainly Cantonese)

will carry equal weighting in the assessment

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Teaching and learning in language lab 39 Hrs

Other student study effort

Doing listening and interpreting exercises outside

class 39 Hrs

Reading lecture notes and doing interpreting

assignments 39 Hrs

Total student study effort 117 Hrs

Reading List and

References

Gentile Adolfo Uldis Ozolins amp Mary Vasilakakos 1996 Liaison

Interpreting A Handbook Melbourne Melbourne University Press

Gillies Andrew 2005 Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting A

Short Course Manchester St Jerome Publishing

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when

they are deemed appropriate

97

Subject Code SPD4568

Subject Title Translation for Business and Commerce

Credit Value 3

Level 4

Medium of

Instruction

English and Chinese

Pre-requisite

Co-requisite

Exclusion

Nil

Objectives

This subject aims to train students in the practice of translation for

business and commerce Students will be introduced to basic concepts

and principles relating to business and commercial translation

Through a variety of hands-on tasks students will acquire and apply

specific strategies and techniques to tackle translational problems in

various types of business and commercial texts Students will also

learn to think critically about ethical issues that professional

translators face in the industry

Intended Learning

Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to

a Reflect critically on basic concepts and principles relating to

business and commercial translation

b Identify specific strategies and techniques in solving

translational problems in business and commercial texts

c Apply the concepts principles strategies and techniques

acquired to the translation of various types of texts in the

business and commercial domain

Subject Synopsis

Indicative

Syllabus

1 the nature and function of business and commercial translation

2 basic concepts and principles

3 translating general business documents strategies and

techniques

4 translating technical financial documents strategies and

techniques

TeachingLearning

Methodology

This subject will be conducted in a highly interactive seminar mode

Lectures will be complemented by hands-on tasks and class

discussions Assignments will be designed to help learners apply the

knowledge acquired in class to practical translation work

98

Assessment

Methods in

Alignment with

Intended

Learning

Outcomes

Specific assessment

methodstasks

weighting

Intended subject learning

outcomes to be assessed

a b c

Continuous

Assessment

100

1 Assignment 1 25

2 Assignment 2 25

3 Assignment 3 25

4 Assignment 4 25

Total 100

Continuous assessment items andor weighting may be adjusted by the

subject lecturer subject to the approval of the School Programme

Committee

Being a skill-oriented subject assessment is based primarily on

assignments and an end-of-semester class test

Student Study

Effort Expected

Class contact

Lectures 26 Hrs

Tutorials 13 Hrs

Other student study effort

Self-study 84 Hrs

Total student study effort 123 Hrs

Reading List and

References Brett Michael (2000) How to Read Financial Pages London Random

House

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2006) Barronrsquos Dictionary of Finance

and Investment Terms 7th edition New York Barronrsquos

Downes J amp Goodman J E (2003) Barronrsquos Finance amp Investment

Handbook New York Barronrsquos

周兆祥(2004)《財經翻譯精要》香港商務印書館

李德鳳(2007)《財經金融翻譯》香港香港大學出版社

白雲開 (2001)《21世紀商用中文書信寫作手冊》香港香港城

市大學出版社

張新紅李明 (2011)《商務英語翻譯》北京高等教育出版社

99

陳仕彬 (2003) 《金融翻譯技法》香港中文大學出版社

許建忠 (2003)《工商企業翻譯實務》香港中文大學出版社

方夢之毛忠明 (2008) 《英漢mdash漢英應用翻譯綜合教程》上

海上海外語教育出版社

李長栓 (2012) 《非文學翻譯理論與實踐》北京中國對外翻譯

出版公司

王恩冕 (2005) 《如何翻譯英語報刋經濟文章》北京對外經濟

貿易大學出版社

The Reading List and References are indicative Relevant reading

materials will be suggested and assigned from time-to-time when they

are deemed appropriate